Prima ry 6

PSLE
PhD Educatlon

Science
Exam Package
Latest Syllabus
Questions
For PSLE
Lqtert
MOE Booklet
fyllobul

lt{ore than 700 0uestions

,,
WithSolutionsand Exp , atoryltlotm

AllThemes Induded (Primary 3, 4, 5, 6)

;[JiversrU
/ Cldes
/ Systems

r' hsactions
,/ tffigy iIx[illilllltlllllLi
S$48 00 (w/o GST)
S$s1 35 (incl GST)
 D Educ

Latest Syllabus
& I
For PSLE
t
:,rrl.l

',::.'

I
With Solu
&

lncluded E

:::,1'.::'*,:,:1

:::::{:

l
ttttl
llall

lil[[tt1il[ [|ilil
l .,.. ....,, $$48 00 ( wlo GS
::pur:r..,,'uii:tuurrr,'- SS51.35( i*ct.

tlrt
PhD Education
21 Woodlonds Close
#09-10
Primz BizHub
5ingopore 737854

Comporry Registrot iofi 53L6232OC

Website: www.phd-educotion.com.sg
Emoil: phd.educction@gmoil.com

@ PhD Educotion
All rights reseryed. No porl of this publicotion moy ba reproduced, stored in o ratrievol system or
tronsmilted, in any form or by ony meons, electronic, mechanicol, photocopying, recording or otharwise,
wilhout the prior permission of the Publisher.

Every effort hos been mode to contoct the holders of copyright materiol, but if ony hove been inodvertenlly
overlooked, the Publisher will be pleased to moke the necessory orrongemenl ot the first opportunily.

First published: 2017

?rd Edition 2OZl

?rorofr Sfre Dreams

-I/you lream to 6e a fuctoa a good-elu.atk n ir e$enhaf
!/you dr?am lo t" a?t/bt, a rood"/t!.a/on 6 ?ss?n/a.t
tfyou {ream to ree tlir 7t 016/2r yoar oyrt"4 a goo[eduaatlon tt' e-ttenti"f
?eoVl?lave lreams
 Primary 6 Science Exam Package
Questions Booklet
Content

Diversity
1 Diversity of Living Things 1
2 Diversity of Materials 13

Cycles
3 Life Cycles of Plants and Some Animals 29
4 Matter 42
5 Reproduction in Plants 57
6 Reproduction in Humans 74
Changes of State 87
o The Water Cycle 105

Systems
9 Plant Systems r12
10 Human and Animal Systems 723
1t The Unit of Life 747
L2 Electrical Systems 156

Interactions
73 Magnets and Magnetic Forces 778
14 Forces 193
15 Living Together 221.
76 Food Chains and Food Webs 250
77 Adaptations 266
18 Man's Impact on His Environment 286

EnerS/
79 Light and Shadows 301
20 Heat and Temperature 313
27 Energy in Food J5 /
22 Forms and Uses of Energy 348
23 Sources of Energy 374
 Theme: Diversiry
F.l
-
1 Diversity of Living Things
1. The following chart shows how plants can be classified
Plants

Flowering plants Non-flowering plants

Aquatic plant Non-aquatic plant Reproduce Reproduce

by seeds by spores
x
Y Z

Which one of the following plants is Z?

(11 Water lily
(2) Hibiscus
t3l Bird's nest fern
t4l Pine

2. Which group of animals below contains only meat-eaters?

1l Man, fox and cow
z) Snail, cow and caterpillar
3l Chicken, cat and rabbit
4) Python, shark and tiger

3. Study the animals shown in the diagram below.

ce

A B C D
Snake Mouse Lizard Guppv

Which ofthe animals above have been classified correctly?

Fish Mammal Reptile

(1) AandD B C

(2) D AandB C

(3) D B AandC
(4) B C AandD

d phD aducation I wurw.phC-ed:..:calion.com.sg

---------r
4. Which one of the following is not a mammal?
N
t1) (2) t3l t4l

Shark Platypus Man Whale

5. Which of the following organisms can make their own food?

A. Bread mould
B. Bird's nest fern
C. Rain tree
D. Moss
(1) A and B only
(2) C and D only
(3) B,CandDonly
(4) A,B,CandD

6. Some animals are classified into four groups as shown below

A B C D
Dog Duck Shark Snail
Sheep Eagle Llzard Crab

They are grouped according to their

t1l method of reproduction

(z) movement
(31 habitat
(4) body covering

7. Some animals were observed and the observations were recorded in the table as shown below.

Observation Spider Butterfly Cockroach Earthworm

It has feelers No Yes Yes Yes

It has 6 legs or more No Yes Yes No

Its body has segments No No Yes Yes

Which one of the following animals is correctly described?

(1) Spider
(2) Butterfly
t3l Cockroach
(4) Earthworm

?hD Edu.ation I www. phd-e d:..::aticn.com.sg

 8. Which one of the following reasons explains why the mushroom and the mould are not plants? r-
(n
t1l They reproduce by spores.
{2) They usually live on other organisms.
t3l They do not have chlorophyll to make their own food.
(4) They cannot move freely from one place to another by itself.

9. Study the following classification chart.

Animals

Group X Group Y Group Z

Whale Molly fish Crocodile

Polar bear Tuna Cobra
Mouse Guppv Turtle

Which of the following statements are correct?

A. There is at least an animal in each group that can swim.
B. Only the animals in Group X give birth to their young alive.
C. The animals are classified according to their animal groups.
D. Animals in Groups Y and Z share at least one common characteristic
(1) A, B and D only
(2) A, B and C only
t3) A, C and D only
(4) B, C and D only

10. Study the classification chart below.

Animals

x Y

Sparrow Bat
Grasshopper Seal
Praying mantis Dolphin

For the above classification, which headings best fit X and Y respectively?

x Y
(1) Insects Mammals

(z) Lay eggs Give birth to young

(31 Live on land Live in water and on land

t4l Have a three-stage life cycle Have a four-stage life cycle

d" D Educaticlr I www.;:id-edr.:cation.com.sg

5 1 1. The diagrams below show two organisms

Bird's nest fern Mushroom

How is the bird's nest fern different from the mushroom?

Bird's nest fern Mushroom

(1) It has flowers. It has no flowers.
(2) It feeds on dead animals It feeds on dead plants

t3) lt reproduces from seeds. It reproduces by spores

t4l It needs sunlight to grow It does not need sunlight to grow.

12. The following table provides information on four plants, C, D, E and F, based on two
characteristics. A tick [/J shows that the plant has the characteristics.
Plants
C D E F
Characteristics
Has flowers
Grows on land
From the information above, where do Plants E and F belong to in the following classification
table?

Plants

Bear fruits Do not bear fruils

Aquatic Non-aquatic Aquatic Non-aquatic

Plant E Plant F

t1l (
(2)
(
t3)
o
(4)
A
PhD Education I www-phd-ed ucalion.corn.sg
13. Study the classification chart below.
r-
x
ul
Y

Frog
a Seal
Mosquito Deer
Grasshopper Rabbit

Which one ofthe following shows how the organisms are grouped?

x Y z
(1) Animals Have wings Do not have wings

(2) Number oflegs Has 6 legs Has 4 legs

(31 Number of stages in life cycle 4 stages 3 stages

(4) Methods of reproduction Lay eggs Give birth to young

14. Four pupils were arguing among themselves while making comparisons of the following
organisms.

organism A Organism B Organism C

Each pupil then made the following statements.

Cheryl: A and B can move on its own but not C.

Lynn: AII the above organisms need food to grow.
Kobe: Only A and B are living things while C is not.
Tommy: B and C contain chlorophyll while A does not.

Which of the above pupil[s] had made the correct statement(s]?

(11 Lynn only
{2) Kobe only
(31 Kobe, Lynn and Cheryl only
(4) Tommy, Kobe and Lynn only

PhD aducation I www.phd-education.com.sg

 15. The flowchart below can be used to distinguish between some types ofplants
C'T
Flowering plants Hydrilla

No
No Yes
Grows on land A Water hyacinth

Yes
No
B Morning glory

Yes
No
C Angsana

Yes

Mango

What do A, B and C in the flowchart represent?

A B C

t1l Has a fleshy stem Has a woody stem Has poisonous fruits
(2) Has spores Has a weak stem Has poisonous fruits
(3) Floats on water Has a woody stem Has fleshy fruits

t4l Has swollen leaf stalks Has a weak stem Has fleshy fruits

16. Study the chart below

Makes its
A
own food

0rganism Can move from place

B
to place by itself
Does not make
its own food
Cannot move from place
C
to place by itself

Which of the following is a possible classification for A, B and C?

A B C

t1j Fern Bread mould Earthworm

(z) Bread mould Fern Amoeba
(3) Bread mould Amoeba Fern
(41 Fern Earthworm Bread mould

PhD Edu.3ai.n ] www. phd-ed:-.l.aairr.com.sg

 it
17. Bird's nest fern is classified as a
(11 fungus........ reproduces by spores
because
t\
--
(2) pIant........ is green in colour
(3) fungus........ grows on trees
(41 plant ........ makes its own food

d ?hD i:ducation I www. phC-e dr:c;licn.com.sg

---------r
s Question 1B
Study the classification chart below.

Animals with backbone

(D (iD

Mammals Birds x Fishes Amphibians

(a) Fill in suitable headings in the boxes labelled (iJ and (ii) in the classification chart above. [2 m]

(bJ What is the group of animals represented by'X'? (1 ml

[cJ Give a reason why the earthworm cannot be placed in the classification chart above. (1 m)

Question 19
Study the flowchart below carefully.

Is it a multi-cellular No
K
organism?

Yes

Can it move No Can it make No

L
about freely? its own food?

Yes Yes ^
M Does it reproduce No
N
by spores?

[a] Give an example of Organism L. [1 m)

[b] Describe Organism N. (2 mJ

PhD E.l!..:icn I www.phd-ed:..:cali3n..o:n.sg

Question 20
Study the classification chart below
C')
-
Plants

Non-Flowering Flowering

Poisonous Non-poisonous Weak stem Strong stem

U

Non-woody Woody
x Y

[aJ Based on the classification chart, describe PlantY. [1 mJ

[bJ In the above chart, which letter best represents 'palm'? (1 m)

[c) What feature does Plant W have to enable itself to get enough sunlight? Explain your answer.
[1 m)

Question 21
Study the classification flowchart below carefully

Living Can make its No Can move on its own from No Yeast
things own food? one place to another? Mould

Yes Yes

Reproduce No Rose Caterpillar

by spores? Hihiscus Man

Yes

Mushroom
Ferns

Which one ofthe above organisms has been classified wrongly? Explain your answer. (1 ml

d ?hD ad.rcation I www.9hd-eCrc;:ion.rlm.sg

-______-r
Question 22
H
o The table below shows the characteristics ofthree animals, D, H and M

Animal Animal H Animal M

Characteristics D

The wav it moves Walks and runs Swims Swims

Where it lives Land Water Water
Gives birth to its
How it reproduces Lays eggs Lays eggs
young
Part ofbody that helps it move Legs Flippers Fins
Through
How it breathes Through nostrils Through gills
blowhole

(aJ Classiry the following three animals and write 'Animal D', 'Animal H' and 'Animal M' in the
correct box. (3 m)

Bird Fish Mammal

[bJ State another characteristic that is found only in Animal H. (1 m)

Question 23
A group of aliens were classified into the four boxes in the classification table below based on their
physical characteristics.

Species Description
A blue eyes, 4 limbs, pointed ears
B red eyes, 4 limbs, round ears
C red eyes, 2 limbs, round ears
D blue eyes, 2 limbs, pointed ears

Based on the information given above, fill in all the empty boxes in the classification chart below
with suitable headings. [3 m]
Aliens

Species A Species B Species C Species D

PhD Educatior I www.phd-ed ucation.com.$:l

 Question 24 --F{
Use the chart below toclassiff the following organisms into four groups. Give an appropriate
heading for each group. [4 m)
Ft
Frog Papaya Fern Yeast

Living things

Make their own food (a)

Reproduce
from seeds
(bxD _ (cXi) (dXD

Eg. papaya (ii) E.e._ (ii) E.e._ (ii) E.e.-

Question 25
Study the flowchart below.

Start

Does the organism

have a backbone?
Yes No

Yes Does it eat both plants Does it make its own Yes
A D
and animals? food?

No No

Yes Does it breathe through Does it have legs? Yes

B E
lungs?

No No

Yes Does it have scales as Does it cause food to Yes

C F
an outer covering? decay?

Which organisms are most likely represented by the letters A to F? Write the letters A to F in the
table below. (3 mJ

Animal Letter
Butterfly
Rat
Bread Mould
Giraffe
Piranha
Moss

Education I www.phd-education.com.sg

drnt
___________-^
uuestron zb
tl
Study the flowchart below carefully and use it to answer the following questions.
ig
Start ------------>
Move freelv from No Make their own No
place to place food

Yes Yes

(a) Fill in the appropriate boxes above with the organisms'fern' and 'mushroom'. [2 m)

[bJ State two ways in which the above organisms are classified. (1 m)

Question 27
Study the flowchart below carefully

Things A

Yes

Is ita living No Can it be used Yes No

ls ita solid? B
thing? as a fuel?

No

Yes C

Does it have more No Does the young look Yes

D
than 4 like the adult?

No
Yes E

Yes
Is it able to fly? F

No

[a] Which letter best represents the following: [2 m]

[i) Coal:

(ii) Butterfly:

(b) Using the information given above, describe 'D'. (1 mJ

PhD Education I www.phd-education.com.sg

d i
 Theme: Diversity
tYl
- r{
2 Diversity of Materials
1. Study the following diagram

2 kg weight

1m
Material

Supports

Derick tested the strengh of five materials by dropping a 2 kg weight from a height of 1 metre.
All materials had the same shape and size. The number of times the weight was dropped before
a material broke into two pieces was recorded. His results were tabulated below.

Material Number of hits

P 4a

a 37

R 64
S 23

T 51

Which one of the following describes the materials correctly?

i1l Material T is metal.

(2) Material P is stronger than Material R.
is) Material T is more flexible than Material P.
(4) Material S is the first one to break if a 3 kg weight is used to repeat the experiment.

2. The material used for a new toy does not break easily even when it is dropped from a great
height. We say that this material is very
(1) heavy
(2) strong
t3) flexible
(4) brittle

D Educaliar I wi,rw.phd education.conr.sE

d-;h
___________-
3. An experiment was conducted using the set-ups below to find out about Oblects A and B. When
H a weight was placed in the tray in Set-up A, the piston moved downwards. More weights were
D added on until the piston could no longer move. The same was done to Set-up B.
Tray
Weight
Piston

Object A object B

Set-up A Set-up B

Which measurement should be taken to compare the compressibility of Objects A and B?

(1) Number of weights
(2) Mass of the obiects
t3l Shape of the objects
(41 Thickness of the objects

4. The diagram below shows a drill bit that is used in a cordless power drill. Holes in wood, metal,
plastic and concrete walls can be drilled with this tool.

Drill bit power drill

Which of the following physical properties describe the material that the drill bit must be made
of!
A. Inflexible
B. Translucent
C. Strong
(11 A and B only
(2) A and C only
t3l B and C only
(4) A,BandC

5. Which property is ofthe least importance in the making ofa raincoat?

(1) Waterproof
(2) Transparent
t3) Flexible
(4) Light

PID Education I www-11:i-edrcation..or.sg

6. Which material is most likely to be suitable for making the handle of a frying pan?
I-

LN
Materials tl.{
Good conductors ofheat Poor conductors ofheat

Magnetic Non-magnetic Flexible Not flexible

A B C D

(1) A
{2) B
(31 C
(4) D

7. In a Science lesson, a group of pupils were given some obiects to classiff. The chart below
shows how the group had classified their obiects.

Materials

Waterproof Not waterproof

Flexible Not flexible Flexible Not flexible

x Y z

What materials are W, X, Y and Z likely to be?

w x Y Z

(1) Rubher Glass Wool Wood

(2) Plastic Wood Cloth Metal
(3) Clay Metal Wood Cloth

(4) Wool Ceramic Plastic Clay

PhD td.carion I www.phd-edrcatio1..,).i.:g

-_-I 8. The properties of four obiects were compared.
F
o! Property
Obiects
A B C D

Non-metal Yes No Yes Yes

Magnetic No Yes No No

Definite shape Yes Yes Yes No

Conduct electricity No Yes No Yes

Which of the following can A, B, C and D be?

A B C D

t1) Ceramic mug Copper wire Mercury Rainwater

(z) Wooden chopsticks Steel screw Kerosene Air
(3) Glass bowl lron nail Plasticine Sea water
(4) Styrofoam container Aluminium foil Apple juice Oxygen

9. Which one of the following classification charts is incorrect?

(11 {2)
Metal Metal

Magnetic Non-magnetic Conductor ofheat Non-conductor of heat

t3l (4)
Fabric Material

Opaque Non-opaque Electrical conductor Electrical insulator

i
10. An object is said to be when it breaks easily.
t1l hard
(2) brittle
(31 strong
(41 flexible

PhD Edlcalion I www.phd-ed;caaion.com-5g

11. The table below shows some materials classified under three different groups A, B and
--
F
C.

Materials
tr{

Envelope silk Thread

Balloon Cheese Disposable cup

Which of the following items is grouped incorrectly?

(11 Envelope
(2) Cheese
(3) Disposable cup
(4) Thread

12. The flowchart shows the classification of some obiects

B
Start
No
Yes Does it take the shape Yes
ls it transparent? A
of its container?
No
Yes Yes
ls it strong? Is it magnetic? C

No No
D E

Which of the following could be A, B, C, D and E?

A B C D E

t1l Clear plastic Frosted glass Steel pin Clay pot Iron rod
(2) Tissue paper Water Zinc rooftop Frosted glass Copper wire

t3) Water Window pane Iron rod Tissue paper Zinc rooftop

t4l Water Clear plastic Iron rod Clay pot Steel pin

d FhD ::drcation I www.phd-edrcalio:1..3r':r.:g

""-""-""-13.
stud y the classification chart given below
H
o Solids

Break when hit Bend when hit

Sink in water Float in water Sink in water Float in water

R s T U

Based on the properties stated in the chart above, where should aluminium foil, iron nail, stone
and ice block be placed in the classification chart?

Aluminium foil Iron nail Stone Ice block

(11 R T U S

(2) T U S R

t3) U S R T
(4) TI T R S

14. Study the classification chart below.

Objects
I
I I

Iron nail Wooden chopsticks

Steel ruler Plastic drinking straw
Copper ring Envelope

Which ofthe following properties can be used to classit/ the objects in the two groups shown
above?
A. Flexibility of materials
B. Metals or non-metals
C. Magnetic or non-magnetic
D. Conductors of electricity or non-conductors of electricity

t1l A and B only

(2) only
B and D
(3) B,CandDonly
(4) A,B,CandD

PtrD Educaaion I www. phd-edrcatacn.com.sg

d
15. Study the classification table below.
--
Cr)
s T r{
Iron frying pan Rubber band
ruler
Steel metal Drawing paper
Nickel window grill Woollen sweater

Which one ofthe following best represents S and T?

s T
(11 Rough Soft

{2) Flexible Non-flexible

(31 Magnetic Non-magnetic

t4) lnelastic Elastic

16. Mountaineers need equipment to enable them to climb up rocky or snow-covered mountains
The diagram below shows a useful tool that they might use in their attempt to climb a
mountain.

Hook

Rope

The material used to make mountaineering equipment is crucial. Which of the following shows
the most suitable properties ofthe materials required in the making ofthe hook and rope
respectively?

Hook Rope

i1) Light Flexible

(2) Strong Flexible

(3) Strong Waterproof

i4l Flexible Strong

d I l) :o-La[,u r l www.phd-educatio,,].com.sF
**-Ttl.
Four different materials of the same size were dipped into four containers each containing a
N certain amount ofwater. The amount ofwater in each container was recorded both before and
O after dipping ofthe materials into the container. The table below shows the results.
Material A Material B Material C Material D
Container Container Container Container
Amount of water in
55 145 70 60
container initially/ ml
Amount of water in
45 115 35 30
container finally/ ml
Which is the best material to make towels?

t1l Material A
(2) Material B
(31 Material C
(41 Material D

18. Study the table below.

x Y 7

lron Rubber Bronze

Copper Plastic Mercury
Salt water Wood Steel

Which one of the following consists of suitable headings for the table?

x Y Z
Poor conductors of Conductors of Good conductors of
t1l heat electricity electricity
Conductors of Poor conductors of Insulators of
(2)
electricity heat electriciW
Conductors of Insulators of Good conductors of
(3)
electriciW electriciW heat
Good conductors of Insulators of Poor conductors of
t4l heat electriciW heat

PhD Edu.atio.r I www.pl-:ri-:d:.,]ca:icn-com.sg

19. Wilbur was told to select the most suitable materials for making raincoats and helmets from the
chart shown below. He was also told not to select the same materials for making the items. F{
Waterproof materials
N
Flexible Non-flexible

High melting point Low melting point Strong Not strong

X,Y 7

Good conductor of heat Poor conductor of heat

Based on the classification chart above, which ofthe following shows the best choice for making
the raincoats and helmets?

Raincoats Helmets
(1) Z

(2) Y

t3l x
(4) V Y

20. Which one ofthe following classification charts is incorrect?

(11 (2)
Materials Materials

0paque Translucent Conductor ofheat Non-conductor ofheat

Steel Frosted glass Carbon Mercury

(31 (41
Materials Materials

Magnetic Non-Magnetic Flexible Inflexible

Cobalt Copper Fabric Ceramic

d ?hD adrcalirlr i www. phd-eCucatior.com.sg

 1. Study the information provided in the classification chart below.
N
-zN Obiects that are made of opaque materials

Conductor of electricity Non-conductor of electricity

Flexible lnflexible Flexible Inflexible

ABCD
Based on the information above, which one ofthe following is a possible combination ofobjects
A, B, C and D?

A B C D

(11 Nylon Iron nail Spectacle Lens Ceramic mug

{2) Nylon Aluminium foil Carpet Rubber tube

(3) Copper wire Steel pipe Rubber tube Spectacle Lens

i4l Copper wire Iron nail Carpet Ceramic mug

22. Lydia was told to observe four unidentified materials, A, B, C and D. Her observations were
listed below.
o Only Material B is attracted to magnets.
o Material A is able to retain heat better than Material B.
o Material C casts a faint shadow when exposed to light but Material D does not.
Which ofthe following correctly matches the description ofthe materials with the observations
listed above?

A B C D

(1) Clay pot Steel pot Frosted glass Glass window

(2) Steel pot Clay pot Glass window Frosted glass
(3) Clay pot Frosted glass Steel pot Glass window

t4) Clay pot Steel pot Glass window Frosted glass

PhD ldu.atlon I www.phd-ed ucation.co,r-sg

23. Study the flowchart below. r--
(n
Material
N
Yes Yes
A B Glass

No No
Yes
C Rubber Ceramics

No

Wood

Which ofthe following are suitable questions that show the characteristics of Materials A, B and
C in the flowchart above?

A B c
Does it allow light to
(11 Is it fragile?
pass through?
Is it flexible?
Does it conduct
(2) Is it flexible? Is it fragile?
electriciw?
Does it conduct
(31 ls it magnetic? Is it fragile?
electricity?
Does it allow light to Does it conduct
(41 Is it magnetic?
pass through? electriciW?

24. The following obiects were classified as shown in the table below
A B C D
Wine glass Socks Chopsticks Nail cutter
Test tube Sweater Toothpicks Chopper
Windscreen Scarf Cloes Scissors

How were the obiects classified?

(1) According to their usefulness to Man
{Z) According to their ability to absorb water
(3) According to the material they are made of
{4) According to the degree oftransparency to light

d PhD Education I www. phd-educalion.cal.:1.:g

___________-^
(,ltesnon z5
Nll
.[ An tnvestlga tion is conducted as shown in the diagram below.

Clamp
Material A
60 g weight
Tape

A strip of Material A is clamped in the middle before taping a 60 g weight to each end of the strip.
The distance, d, is measured. Using the same set-up, the investigation is repeated with Materials B,
C and D and the results are recorded in the table below. For all the four materials, the length ofthe
strips remains the same during the investigation.

Material Distance, d/ cm
A 3

B 12

C 7

D 9

[a) What property of the material was investigated? [1 mJ

(b) State another variable that should be kept constant for a fair comparison. (1 mJ

[c) Based only on the data collected, which material (A, B, C or D) is most suitable for making a
belt? (1 mJ

PirD Education I www.phd-educaaicri.com.sg

Question 26 --tn
Study the table below.
N
Conductor Good
Magnetic of Waterproof conductor Breakable
Materials elecEicity ofheat

x
Y

Based on the information in the table above, put a tick (/) in the appropriate column to indicate if
each of the following statement is 'True', 'False' or 'Not possible to tell'. (4 m)

Statements True FaIse Not possible to tell

Magnetic materials are also good
conductors of electricity.
Only non-conductors of electricity are
breakable.
Waterproof materials can float on
water.
Material X is waterproof and breakable.

PhD !ducali{)n I vuww. phd-edrcat!on-.l]m.;g

------- Question 27
N Eight obiects are to be classified into a classification chart. Firstly, the eight obiects are classified
Or
into two groups offour each. Subsequently, each group is further classified into two smaller groups
of two objects each.

[a) Complete the chart by drawing in the rest of the missing objects. [3 m)

a
o ,

[bJ State the property that you have used to classi$, the obiects into the last four boxes. (1 m)

Question 28
The properties of different types of plastics were tested in a factory and the results are shown in
the table below.

Property Plastic E Plastic F Plastic G Plastic H

Lightweight No Yes Yes No

Waterproof No Yes No Yes

Plastic F is the most suitable material for school bags. Explain why. (2 m)

thD Edu.ation ! www. ph d-ed ucation..cn.sg

d
 I--
Question 29
N
Some items are classified into three groups, X, Y and Z, as shown in the able below.
N
Group X Group Y Group Z

Iron grille Clear plastic Frosted glass

Mirror Glass bulb Handkerchief
Aluminium can Spectacle lenses Rice paper

(aJ The arrows as shown below indicate the amount of light that can pass through the items in
Groups X, Y and Z. Fill in the blanks with X, Y and Z. (1 ml

0o/o l0Oo/o

[b] There is an alternative way of classifiring the items. Draw a classification table in the box below
to show another way of classiffing all the items into two groups. Give an appropriate heading
for each group. (2 m)

Educalion I www-phr!-e**catian.com.sB
d-*o
 Question 30
N
6 Study the classification chart below.

Object

Opaque Transparent

Better conductor Poorer conductor Better conductor Poorer conductor

ofheat ofheat ofheat ofheat

A B C D

Thermal conductivity is a measurement ofthe rate ofheat flow through different materials. A
material with a higher thermal conductivity is a better conductor ofheat. Based on the information
given below, complete the classification chart. (2 m)

Material Thermal Conductivity (W/mK)

Baby Oil 0.15

Copper 401
Water 0.58

Corkboard 0.043

A:

B:

C:

Dr

ptrD Educatlon www.phd-ed:.:caaion..om.sg

I
 Theme: Cycles
r--
C')
N
Life Cycles of Plants and
3
Some Animals
1. Which of the following correctly shows the life cycle of a plant?

(1) seed Q)
Seed

/\(
Flower and fruit Seedling Adult plant Flower and fruit

Adult plant Seedling

(31 a seed
(4)
Seed

fruit
Flower and Adult plant Adult plant Seedling

\ seedlins Flower and fruit

2. The graph below shows the stages in the life cycle of a certain insect and the length of time the
insect remains in these stages.

Average number of days

20
18
t6
74
t2
10
8
6
4
2
0 Stages
Egg Adult Pupa Larva

How many days does it take for the insect to become a pupa after the egg has been laid?
(1) 2
(2) 7
(31 18
t4) 20

PhD Education I www. phd-education.com.sg

.._3
The diagram below shows a bean plant at different stages ofits growth
(^,
o
q q
0
A B C D
^
At which stage[sJ is sunlight essential for further healthy growth?
t1) C only
(2) A and C only
(31 A, B and D only
(41 A, B, C and D

4. Study the life rycles of Animals A and B below.

Ecc Egg

Adult Larva Adult Nymph

Pupa
Animal A Animal B
Based on the life cycles of Animal A and Animal B, it can be inferred that
A. Animal B has 3 stages in its life rycle while Animal A has 4.
B. Animal A lays eggs in water while Animal B lay eggs on land.
C. The young ofAnimal A looks like the adult but the young of Animal B does not.
D. Animal A takes a longer time than Animal B to develop from an egg to an adult.
(1) A only
(2) Band Donly
(3) A, B and C only
t4) A, B, C and D only

5. The followinS are the descriptions ofAnimal X:

Lays eggs in water Has 3 stages in its life cycle
Which of the following statements about Animal X is/are definitely true?
A. Animal X is not a mosquito.
B. The adult of Animal X lives on land.
C. The young of Animal X lives in water.
D. The young of Animal X looks like its adult.
(11 A only
(2) A and C only
t3l A,CandDonly
(41 B,CandDonly

PhD Education I www.phd-ed ucation.com.sg

d
6. At which stage of the life cycle of a mosquito can it be killed by spraying oll on tne surrace or tne-
water? F{
(n
A. Egg stage
B. Larva stage
C. Pupa stage
D- Adult stage
(7) A and B only
(2 l only
B and C
(3 ) A,BandConly
(4) A,B,CandD

7. Study the following flow chart.

Organisms

Does it have a 4-stage Yes

L
life cycle?

No

Does the young resemble Yes

M
the parent?

No
N

Which one ofthe following represents L, M and N correctly?

L M N

(11 Dragonfly Toad Butterfly

(2) Grasshopper Dog Mosquito
(3) Butterfly Chicken Frog

t4) Moth Frog Housefly

d PhD Eo-cdtion I www.phd education.corr.sg

-----. The diagram below shows the life cycle ofa mosquito.
(A,
N

Which one of the following groups of animals has a similar life rycle as the mosquito?
(1) Spider, housefly, termites
(2) Cotton weevil, beetle, dragonfly
(3) Grasshopper,goldfish,butterfly
(4) Mealworm beetle, moth, fruit fly

9. Study the table below.

CharacterisHc AnimalA Animal B

(aJ It has four stages in its life cycle
[bJ It is a pest in one or more of its stages
[c) The young resembles the adult.

[cv
/: Characteristic is present
x: Characteristic is absent

Which of the following pairs of animals fits the descriptions in the table above?

AnimalA Animal B
(11 Ant Mosquito
(2) Cricket Grasshopper
(31 Housefly Mealworm beetle
(41 Butterfly Cockroach

PhD Education I www.phd-education.com

 I-
1.0. The diagram below shows the difference in the appearance ofa leaf within a day
(Yt
(Yt

+
Which one of the following stages of the life cycle of the butterfly could have caused the change
in the appearance ofthe leaP

t1l Ege
(2) Larva
t3l Pupa
(4) Adult

11. The graph below shows the number ofdays in each stage ofthe life cycle ofan insect.
Days

25

20

15

10

Stage
Egg Larva Pupa Adult Adult
female male

Using the information from the graph above, which of the following statement[s] is/are true?
A. The insect has a four-stage life cycle.
B. The whole life cycle ofthis insect requires 69 days.
C. The process from egg to pupa takes 17 days.
D. There are more female insects than male insects.

i1l A only
(2) A and D only
t3l B and D only
(4j B,CandDonly

d PhD Education I www. phd-ed ucation.com. sg

 The diagram below shows a cockroach and a dragonfly
w
5
-12.

Cockroach Dragonfly

Which of the following statement(s) about their life cycles is/are correct?
A. Both their young do not resemble their parents.
B. Both their young hatch from fertilised eggs.
C. The dragonfly spends part of its life in the water but the cockroach does not.
D. There are four stages in the life cycle ofthe dragonfly while the cockroach has three
stages in its life rycle.

t1l C only
(2) AandBonly
(3) BandConly
t4l A, B, C and D

13. Each letter in the diagram below represents a stage in the life cycle ofa mealworm beetle.

Which ofthe following statements are true ifStage G represents the adult stage?
A. At Stage H, it has developed wings.
B. At Stage G, it spends most ofits time eating.
C. At Stage E, it moults several times as it grows.
D. At Stage F, it does not move around and does not eat.

t1) AandBonly
(2) AandConly
(31 BandDonly
(4) Cand Donly

PhD Education I www. phd-education.com.sg

 I--
Question 14
ln
The diagram below shows the stages of the growth ofa green bean seedling.
fn
A

Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3 Stage 4

Stage 1 2 3 4

Amount of starch present 0.25 g 0.20 g 0.15 g 0.20 g

Do you think the part labelled 'A' is important to the plant at Stage 4? Please explain your answer.
(1 m)

Question 15
The diagrams below show the different stages of the growth ofa bean seed.
EFG H

(a) Arrange the growth of the bean plant in the correct order to show how a bean seed grows into a
seedling. (1 m)

[b) At which stage ofthe plant does it need sunlight? (1 m)

(cJ What are the conditions needed for seed germination? [1 m)

d PhD Fducation I www. phd-eC ucat ion.com.sg

--___---.
d) The mass of the seed leaves at different stages is recorded in the table below.
u) r'

Or Stage Mass ofseed leaves/ g

E 2.0

F 7.7

G 1.3

H 2.2

(i) Based on the able, what happened to the mass of the seed leaves? (1 m)

(iil Give a reason for your answer in part (dl[i]. (1 m)

Question 16
The diagram below shows a young plant growing from a bean seed.
(al Name the parts ofthe seedling marked A and B. (2 m)

A:
B

(bJ What is the function of the part marked A? (1 m)

PhD Educalion I www. phd-ed ucation.com.sg

 Question 17
r-
The diagram below shows the stages in the growth ofa seedling and the mass ofstarch present at
N
(n
each stage.

Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3 Stage 4

O.2l g 0.16 g 0.03 g 0.19 g

[a) Identiff the parts labelled X. [1 mJ

(b) What is a possible reason for

(i) the decrease in mass from Stage 1to Stage 3? (1 mJ
(iiJ the increase in mass from Stage 3 to Stage 4? [1 m)
Reason for (il:
Reason for (ii)

Question 1B
Valerie placed Beans X, Y and Z between some cotton wool and the inside wall ofa glass bottle. The
bottle was then filled with some water.

Glass bottle

Cotton wool

Water

After a few days, Valerie noticed roots and shoots growing out ofall three beans and she drew what
she saw in the diagram above for Beans Y and Z.

[a] Help Valerie to draw in the root and shoot of Bean X in the diagram above. (1 mJ
(b) What does the above experiment show about the growth ofthe root and shoot ofa bean plant?
(2 m)

Education I www.phd-education.com.sg
d-',hD
 w
ii Densue fever is a common mosquito borne viral disease which is transmitted by the Aedes
w mos"quito.
-oues!ion-1-9 The diagrams below ihow examples of uncovered and covered bamboo pole holders

Mrs. Lim's flat Mrs. Wong's flat

Uncovered bamboo pole holders Covered bamboo pole holders

(aJ Officers from National Environment Agency (NEAJ fined one ofthe flat-owners for encouraging
the breeding ofmosquitoes. Who was fined? Explain your answer. [1 m)

(b) The diagram below shows the life cycle ofthe mosquito.
Adult mosquito

Pupa
Egg

Wriggler

(iJ At which stage of the life cycle is the mosquito most harmful to man? Explain why. [1 m)

(iiJ Oil can be sprayed onto water surfaces of ponds to kill the mosquitoes at the egg, larva and
pupa stages. However, this method can be harmful to other organisms in the pond. Explain why.
(1 mJ

PhD Education I www. phd-ed ucalic..c.,n.sg

 (iiiJSuggest two other ways in which the population of mosquitoes in the community can be
---
reduced drastically. (2 mJ or
(n

Question 20
The diagram below shows the different stages in the life cycle oflnsect S.

EF G

[a) Put Stages E, F and G in the life cycle of Insect S below. (1 m)

Egg

[b) State a difference between the life rycle of Insect S and the life cycle of a cockroach. [1 m]

question 21
The diagram below shows the young of two insects.

Cockroach nymph Mosquito larva

(a) Name a process that both the nymph and the larva go through as they grow into adults. (1 m)

(bJ Freddy found a container with mosquito larvae. He sprayed a layer ofoil on the surface ofthe
water. After some time, the larvae were dead. Explain why they died. (1 m)

d" D Educatio,) | www. phd-ed ucation.com.sg

---_--____r^
t,llesnon lz
.E--
(hr The diagram below shows the life cycle of a frog and a hen.

Frog Hen

Egg Tadpole x Chick

Egg
x

(a) What process must happen at X in both the life rycle of the frog and that of the hen such that
their eggs will continue to develop into t}re next stage of each life cycle? (1 m)

[bJ Why is Process X placed after the egg stage in the life rycle of the frog while Process X is placed
before the egg stage in the life rycle of the hen? (2 mJ

Question 23
Study the classification chart below.

Life Cycle of Animals

(i) (ii)

2 stages 3 stages 3 stages 4 stages

A Platypus Lay eggs Lay eggs Lay eggs Lay eggs

Spiny Anteater on land in water on land in water

B C D E

(aJ Fill in suitable headings in the boxes labelled (i) and [iiJ in the classification chart above. (2 m]

[b) Name the method of reproduction for organisms in Group A. (1 m)

(c) Which group, A, B, C, D or E, does the dragonfly belong to? (1 m)

[d] Which group oforganisms, A, B, C, D or E,lay eggs on land and have 4 stages in the life cycle?
(1 m)

PhD Education I www.phd-educalion.com.sg

 Question 24 ---FI
The classification chart shows how some animals are grouped
<r
Animals

A B C

Mealworm beetle Dog Grasshopper

Mosquito Whale Chicken
Moth Goat Crocodile

[aJ How is the method of reproduction of the animals in Groups A and C different from that of
Group B? (1 m)

(bJ Under which heading will you put "cockroach"? (1 m)

d" Dfd -c;ri11 lwww.phd-eoucation.com.sg

-""""_"""_"r
Theme: Cycles
F
N
4 Matter
1. John attempted to pump air into the balloon as shown in the diagram below. After three pumps,
he found that he could not pump any more air into the balloon. In order to pump more air into
the balloon, which ofthe following methods should he use?

Delivery tube

Rubber stopper n
Air pump
Balloon

Plastic bottle

(1) Use a longer delivery tube.

lZ) Use a more powerful pump.
t3) Make a hole in the plastic bottle.
(4) Immerse the plastic bottle into hot water.

2. The diagram shows a water container with a capacity of 4000 cm3. It contains 1000 cm3 of
water.

4000 cm3 container

Tap
1000 cm3 ofwater
Bottle

When the tap ofthe container is turned on and water flows out for a few seconds and then
turned off, 500 cm3 ofwater is collected in the bottle. lVhat is the final volume of air in the
container?
t1l 3500 cm3
(2) 3800 cm3
(31 4000 cm3
(4) 4500 cm3

PID Ed!calion I www.phd-education.com-sg

3. The container as shown in the diagram below contains some water r-
(n
Stone $

What will happen to the water level and volume of water when the stone is placed into the
container?

Water level Volume of water

(11 lncreases Remains the same
(2) Decreases Remains the same

t3) Increases lncreases

t4) Decreases Increases

4. Tom filled a graduated tube with water and placed it into a beaker of water. Then, he exhaled
into the delivery tube as shown in the diagrams below.
Water

Delivery tube Graduated Delivery tube Graduated

tube tuhe

Beaker Retort stand Beaker Rebrt stand

Before exhalation After exhalation

Tom was trying to find out

(1] ifwater takes up space
(Z) ifoxygen takes up space
(31 the amount ofgas he breathed out
(4) the amount ofoxygen he breathed out

li) iu-La1ic'r I www.phd-educirlic'r.: 11- .g

-'_________-
5. Three syringes are each filled with three matters, A, B and C. An index finger is then used to
F
5 cover each syringe and the piston is pushed as shown in the diagram below.

Piston

Matter

The distances moved by the piston for each syringe are recorded in the table below

Distance moved by piston/ cm

A B C

0.1 0 0.5

Which one ofthe following best represents A, B and C?

A B c
(11 Air Salt Carbonated water

{2) Salt Carbonated water Air

i3l Carbonated water Air Salt

(4) Carbonated water Salt Air

6. An experiment is conducted to see which type of soil allows the most amount of water to pass
through.

Water
Soil

Measuring cylinder

Which of the following variable(sJ must be kept constant for a fair test?
A. Type ofsoil used
B. Amount of soil used
C. Amount ofwater poured on each type ofsoil
D. Time taken for the water to pass through the soil
(11 A only
(2) A and C only
(3) B,CandDonly
t4) All of the above

PhD Education I www. phd-e Clcaaion.com.sg

d
 7. The diagram below shows a U-shaped glass tube containing some water I-
rrl
Glass tube sf
Water

Which one of the following diagrams shows how the water in the tube would look like when the
glass tube was tilted?

t1l (z) i3l (4)

B. An experiment was set up below to find the volume of Object C

Object C

Displacement can 0pening

Beaker

Be[ore the experiment During the experiment

The teacher told the class that the amount of water collected in the beaker is not the volume of
Object C. What can be done to improve the accuracy ofthe experiment?

t1) Repeat the experiment three times and take the average.
(2) The amount ofwater left in the displacement can needs to be measured.
(3) The amount ofwater in the beaker needs to be subtracted from the total volume of
water in the displacement can.
(4) Ensure that the water level in the displacement can is iust below the opening ofthe can
before the start ofthe experiment.

d PhD !C.rcal,*r I www.qhd-edrcation.com.sg

--'.'-.--9
Diagram 1 shows a beaker containing a certain amount ofwater. Diagram 2 shows the same
F
CN
beaker ofwater when Obiect X is placed into it.

50 cm3 Beaker 50 cm3

40 40

30

Water Obiect X

Diagram 1 Diagram 2

From the diagrams, the volume of Object X is

(11 10 cm3
{2) 35 cm3 -
t3l between 10 cm3 and 20 cm3
(41 hetween 25 cm3 and 35 cm3

10. The diagram below shows three substances, P, Q and R, in three identical containers

R
P

Which of the statements are definitely true?

A. Substance R is a solid.
B. Substance Q is a liquid.
C. Substances P and R have definite shapes.
D. Substances Qand Rhave definite volumes

t1l AandConly
(2) A and D only
(31 BandConly
(41 BandDonly

phD :du.:ti3n I www.phd-ed;cat:on..om.sg

11. The diagram below shows the positions ofdifferent liquids when placed toge ther in containers. :-

@H@H
N
$
Which of the following shows correctly what will happen when they are all placed in a
container?

(1) (2) (31 (41

t irdtitdtftitEt
I

12. Four set-ups were prepared to find out which set-up will allow water to flow through the
funnel in the shortest period of time.
Hand

Rubber Wire gauze

Sponge
stopper

B C D

Which one of the following correctly shows the rate at which the water flows through the
funnel from the fastest to the slowest?

t1) A C,D,B
(z) A D,C,B
(31 B C,A,D
(4) B D,C,A

13. The following statements are some observations of matter made by Raja
A. It has a definite shape.
B. It has a definite volume.
C. It has no definite shape.
D. It cannot be compressed.
Which of the following matter is definitely a solid?
i1l A only
(Z) AandConly
t3l BandC only
(4) A, B and C only

d phD Io..,.,rl r.-r r I www. p hd.educal io1 cor. !f

-- A measuring rylinder was filled with 100 cm: of water. Another similar measuring cylinder was
-'t+.
F filled with ball bearings to the 100 cm3 mark. Subsequently, both the water and the ball
6 bearings were transferred into an empty 200 cm3 measuring cylinder.

200 cm3

100 cm3
Water
200 cm3

100 cm3
200 cm3

100 cm3
Ball bearings

Which one of the following diagrams shows the possible volume occupied by the water and the
ball bearings in the 200 cm3 measuring cylinder?

200 cm3 200 cm3 200 cm3 200 cm3

100 cm3 100 cm3 100 cm3 100 cm3

t1l (2) t3l t4l

PhD Education I www-phd-education.co,x.sg

Ouestion 15
r-
C')
Study the flowchart below and answer the questions based on the flowchart.
\f
Start

No
Does it have mass? Group A

Yes

No
Does it have definite volume? Croup B

Yes
No
Group C

Yes

Solid

(a) What should be the question that is to be placed in 'X'? (1 m)

(b) Which group, A, B or C, should 'Electricity' belong to? Give a reason for your answer. [1 m]

0uestion 16
Helen wants to find the volume ofthe hole as shown in the diagram below

Hole

She has a beaker of water and a measuring cylinder only. List four steps she should take in order to
determine the volume of the hole above. [4 m)

Step what should be done

1

d ?hD ad:rcation I www. phd-edrr;lirn.rom.sg

___________r^
uuesflon I /
ut
f-r The following items were given to a student to conduct an experiment:
o Measuring cylinder
o A ball of string
. 500 cm3 of water
. Obiect A
. Obiect B
The aim of the experiment is to measure the volume of Object A and Object B with the items given.
200 cm3 of water is poured into the measuring cylinder. A string is then tied to Obiect A before
lowering it into the measuring cylinder with 200 cm3 of water.

String
275 cm3
200cm3 -i-r----r-------

Obiect A

(aJ What is the volume of Obiect A fignoring the stringJ? [1 m)

Obiect A was taken out ofthe water and Obiect B that has been tied with a string was lowered into
the water. It was observed that Object B did not sink in the water and therefore was impossible to
measure the volume ofObiect B accurately.

object B

[b) Using only the given items, explain how the volume ofObject B can be found out accurately in
three steps. (4 m)

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

PhD Education I www. phd-education.com.sg

Question 18
F{
The aim ofan experiment is to find out the amount ofair retained by different types ofsoil. Three
different types ofsoil, B, C and D, were obtained from the school garden, Botanical Garden and
- tn
Changi beach respectively. One cupful ofsoil was poured into each ofthe cylinders as shown in the
diagram below
B C D

Subsequently, a cupful ofwater was poured into each ofthe cylinders at the same time. The
diagrams show the initial observations ofthe three set-ups after the water was poured into the
cylinders.

B C D

Water
Water

(a) Which soil contained the most amount of air in it? (1 mJ

(b) Give an explanation for your answer in part (a). (2 mJ

Question 19
Condensed milk is to be poured out from a tin. A small hole is punched in one tin and two holes are
punched in another tin as shown in the diagram below.

Tin X Tin Y

Second hole
First hole Firs t hole

In which tin, X or Y, would the condensed milk flow out faster? Explain your answer. (2 mJ

d PhD :cJcation I www.phd-education.com.sg

.==---ouestron2o
ut The diagram below shows a 500 cm3 flask which contains 150 cm3 ofwater and a syringe which
f,I
-- contains 80 cm3 of air. When the syringe is pushed all the way down, all the air in it entered the
flask.

Plunger of syringe

Syringe

80 cm3 of air

Flask

500 cm3 flask

150 cm3 ofwater

(aJ What is the final volume of air in the flask when the syringe is pushed all the way down twice?
(1 m)

[b) From the experiment and results in part (aJ, list the property of air. (1 mJ

PhD Education I www.phd-education.com.sg

d
 Ouestion 21
--tn
An experiment is shown in the diagram below. A plastic cup is inverted and pushed slowly into the
basin of water.
1n

Transparent plastic cups

Basins

Water

Before the cup was pushed in After the cup was pushed in

(a) It is observed that water did not enter the cup completely. Explain why this is so. (1 ml

(bJ Suggest a way how the inverted cup can be filled completely with water without lifting it out of
the basin. [1 m)

Question 22
Two similar glass containers, P and Q, both with a maximum capacity of 3000 cm3 were both filled
with 2000 cm3 ofwater and capped. They were placed on a balance.

3000 cmr capacity Blass containers

P 2000 cm3 ofwater a

Through a special hole in the cap, another 300 cm3 ofair is pumped into Container P and another
100 cm3 of air is pumped into Container Q. The caps were resealed so that air could not escape and
both containers were placed on the balance again.
(a) What happens to the balance? Explain your answer. [2 mJ

(bJ What is the volume of air in each container now? [2 mJ

Volume of air in Container P:

Volume of air in Container Q:

Ic -r-:: i: n lwww.ond-educalior, r^1 ,6

dor'
-__________-
Question 23
{JI
D A hole is made at the bottom of a plastic bottle containing water. However, it was noticed that the
water did not flow out from the hole.

Air-tight cap
x

Plastic bottle

Z
Hole

[aJ Explain why the water could not flow out ofthe bottle. [1 mJ

(bJ To make the water flow out more easily, another hole can be made. At which position - X, Y or
Z, should the second hole be made in order for the water to flow out the fastest? Explain your
answer. [1 m)

Question 24
A measuring cylinder is filled completely with sand as shown in the diagram below.

Measuring rylinder

Sand

Some water is then poured slowly from a beaker until it reaches the brim ofthe measuring
cylinder. Only 26 ml of water could be poured in.
[a] What other observation could be made while pouring in the water? [1 mJ

[b) Explain why water was able to be poured in even though the measuring cylinder was already
completely filled with sand? [1 mJ

PhD Education I www.lli-education.com.sg

 I--
Question 25
rn
An experiment is conducted to find out which soil sample can hold water longer. The diagrarn
below shows the materials needed for the experiment:
tn
o A measuring cylinder
o A funnel containing some cotton wool
o Equal amount of two soil samples
o Two beakers ofwater
. A stopwatch

Funnel
Cotton wool

100 ml ofwater 100 ml ofwater

,illi\ ,at@!

\:::::::::::)
.rt,.:j/ \$tttttllffi Stopwatch
'r{i8#Iiq

Measuring cylinder
Soil sample A Soil sample B

The results ofthe experiment are shown in the table below.

Soil Sample Time taken to collect 60 ml of water/ s

A 42

B 1B

(al Describe the procedure to find out which soil sample can hold water longer. (3 m]

(b) Which soil sample is more suitable to grow a cactus? Why? [1 mJ

[c] lf soil sample A is garden soil, predict the time taken to collect 60 ml of water from clayey soil
(1 m)

d )l ii :o-ualion ] www.phd-oc-c.rt.J 'i.-om.rg

___________r^
uuesuon zb
uI
1a1
.
experiment
An is conducted to find out the relationship between the number of marbles in a
- ' container and how tow this container would sink when it is placed in water. Different numbers of
similar marbles are put into five similar containers, A, B, C, D and E.

C
A @
B
cco&
C
A
B co
oco&
D
2
E D E
'l

Diagram 1 Diagram 2

[a] Diagram 1 shows what happens when all the five containers are put into a tank of water. How
many marbles can be put into Container D? (1 m)

(bJ Diagram 2 shows what happens when all the five similar containers are put into a similar tank
filled with less amount of water. The diagram below shows a boat carrying a full load of fish
stuck on the seabed at low tide.

Sea Low tide

Seahed

The fisherman needed to throw some fish into the sea. After he did so, the boat would lift off the
seabed and be able to move forward. By observing Container D in both Diagrams 1 and 2,
explain if the fisherman needed to throw more or fewer fish into the sea to lift the boat offthe
seabed at high tide. [1 m)

pa:D fdu.ation I www. phd-educaairn.com.sg

 Theme: Cycles
--
\
rrt
5 Reproduction in Plants
1. Study the diagrams below

Mushroom Toadstool Ladder fern

ln terms ofreproduction, what do these organisms above have in common?

i1l They contain chlorophyll.
(2) They reproduce by spores.
(31 They feed on decaying matter.
t4l They are flowering organisms.

Z. A test is conducted to find out whether light is an essential factor for seed germination. While
keeping other conditions favourable for germination, Container A is placed in a cupboard and
Container B is placed near the window ofa room. What would the results be?
(1) Only the seeds in Container A will germinate.
(2) Only the seeds in Container B will germinate.
(3) The seeds in both containers will germinate.
t4l The seeds in both containers will not germinate

3. Three students studied the reproduction methods of Organisms A and B as shown in the
diagrams below.
parent cell ofA Parent plant of B

Offspring
0ffspring

The three ofthem recorded their observations in their Science workbooks. Which ofthese
students made the correct statement(s)?
A. The offsprings have better resistance against bacteria than their parents.
B. The offspring ofOrganism B is not likely to produce better fruits than its parents.
C. Both the offspring of Organisms A and B are genetically identical to their parents.

t1l A only
{2) B only
(3) A and B only
(41 B and C only

d ,hlJ c-L.rt L r I w^\,v.phl (,o-j,l1iu1.Lort.,g

---_'"_"_'-
4. Flowers A and B belong to different species. A pollen grain from Flower A lands on the stigma of
ul Flower B as shown in the diagram below.
@

Flower A Flower B

What will happen after a week?

(11 A pollen tube will grow down the style of Flower B.
{2) The petals of Flower B will wither.
i3) No changes to the petals of Flower B.
t4) The ovary of Flower B will be swollen.

5. Which one ofthe following statements about reproduction in flowering plants is incorrect?
(11 Pollination occurs before fertilisation.
12) Pollen grains are produced in the pollen sac.
i3l The male cell fuses with the egg cell in the ovule.
(41 The pollen grain moves down the style to reach the ovules

6. The diagram below shows a male flower. The flower has small petals, long filaments and
stamens that are sticking out of the flower.

How is the above flower most likely pollinated?

t1) By wind
(2) By water
t3l By animal
(4) By explosive action

la, Ed!.:i:.. I www.pi.:i-edrcation.com.sg

7. The diagram below shows the cross-section of a flower.
r-
ct)
F rn
E

H G

Which one of the labelled parts will develop into a fruit?

(11 E
(2) F
(3) G
(41 H

B. Eight green bean seeds were planted under suitable conditions for them to grow. At the end of
each day, one seedling is removed, dried and then weighed to find the masses ofits seed leaves
and seedling separately. The findings are recorded in the graph below.

Mass/ g
Parts of a seed
Seedling
Seedling

Seed Ieaves
Seed leaves
Days
012345678

P
6l ? ffi
Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5 Day 6 Day 7 Day 8

Based on the graph, which one ofthe following is true?

(1) Both their masses changed at the same rate.
(2) The mass of the seedling was similar to the mass of the seed leaves.
(31 The mass ofseed leaves was always greater than the mass ofthe seedling.
(4] The mass ofthe seed leaves decreased as the mass ofthe seedling increased.

Eoucatiol l *,r,\1,.pnd eoucaliol ccr..p

...-9
Which one ofthe differences between wind-pollinated flowers and insect-pollinated flowers is
(r) incorrect?
()
Wind-pollinated flower Insect-pollinated fl ower
t1) Petals usually small and dull Petals usually large and colourful

(z) Nectar absent Nectar present

(3) Produces less pollen Produces more pollen

t4) No smell Usually has smell

10. An experiment is set up in a dark room as shown in the diagram below

Coloured oil droplet

Thermometer

Stopper
Ruler
Water
Wire mesh

Germinating peas
Solution to absorb carbon dioxide

What will be observed about the oil droplet and what is a possible explanation for this?
(11 [t shifts toward X as the germinating peas take in oxygen.
{2) [t will not move as germination cannot take place in a dark room.
(31 It shifts away from X as the germinating peas give out carbon dioxide.
t4) It will not move as the germinating peas take in oxygen and release carbon dioxide

11. Which of the following statements are true?

A. All flowers have male and female parts.
B. Only flowering plants reproduce from seeds.
C. The ovary is present in the female part of the flower.
D. Pollen grains are produced by the male part ofthe flower

t1l A and B only

(2) Cand D only
t3) B,CandDonly
(4) A,B,CandD

PhD Education I www.phd-educaaicn..om.sg

12. The diagram below shows the fruit of some plants. r-
F{
(.C'
Fleshy and Sweet

a
a
a
a
a I
Seed

Fruit A Fruit B

How are Fruits A and B dispersed?

Fruit A Fruit B

t1) Wind Animals

(2) Animals Wind
(31 Animals Splitting Action

{4) Splitting Action Animals

13. Study the flowchart below. It shows the characteristics of different plants, A, B, C and D

Start

Does it have a hard Yes Yes

Is it pod-like?
outer covering?

No

Are the fruits Yes

fleshy?

No

Does it have stiff Yes

hair?

No

Does it have wing- Yes

like structure?

Based on the flowchart, which ofthe following young plant is the most likely to grow near its
parent plant?
(11 A
(Z) B
t3) c
{4) D

d PhD Education I www.phd-education.com.sg

-- lt+. lohnson conducted an experiment on the germination of seeds. He placed the same number of
CD ieeds in each of Containers A and B. Container A was placed in the cupboard while Container B
N was placed in the garden. He watered them daily with the same amount of water. After a week,
he observed that the seeds which had germinated in Container A had yellow leaves while the
seeds which had germinated in Container B had green leaves. What could fohnson conclude
from his experiment?
t1l The seeds in Container B germinate faster than those in Container A as light is present.
(2) The seeds in both containers need light, water, air and warmth to germinate.
(3) The seedlings in both containers need green light to make food.
t4) The leaves in both containers need light to produce chlorophyll.

15. The diagram below shows the different parts of a flower

Stigma
Style

Petal
Anther
Filament

Ovary
Flower stalk

Ifthe black dots in the options below represent pollen grains from the flower, which ofthe
following flowers have been successfully pollinated?

Flower A Flower B

Flower C Flower D

(11 FlowersAandBonly
(2) FlowersBandConly
t3) Flowers A, C and D only
(4) Flowers A, B, C and D

phD Ldu..aion I www. phd-e dlca::3n..om.sg

16. The diagrams below show the same type of flowers found in a garden. Flowers B, and D have
some parts removed from them.
C
-l(n
(c'

Flower A Flower B Flower C Flower I)

Which flower(sJ could still possibly develop into a fruit?

(1) Flower A only
(2) FlowersAandDonly
(3) FlowersBandConly
{4) Flowers A, C and D only

17. Study the flowchart below

Pollen grains from male flower

Process X

Female flower

Process Y

The ovary becomes The ovule becomes

A B

Which one of the following correctly identifies the processes X, Y and the parts A, B?

Processes Parts ofthe plant

x Y A B

t1) Fertilisation Pollination Fruit Seed

(2) Pollination Fertilisation Seed Fruit

(3) Pollination Fertilisation Fruit Seed

(4) Fertilisation Pollination Seed Fruit

d uhD FduLation | \ivvr,! p cj cc-.Jt ,.'. )- !!

 The di agram below shows the cross-section of a flower
(r)
5
-18- P

R S

Which ofthe following statements below are true about the parts P, Q R and S ofthe flower?
A. Part P allows the pollen tube to reach Part S.
B. Part Q attracts pollinators like insects and birds.
C. Part R will enlarge and develop into a fruit.
D. Part S is the area where fertilisation occurs.

t1l AandBonly
(2) AandDonly
(31 A, and D only
C

t4l B, C and D only

19. The diagram below shows the cross-section of a flower.

Based on the above diagram, identify the correct method ofpollination for this flower and its
corresponding characteristic.

Pollination Method Characteristic

t1l Insect The reproductive parts are hidden in the flower

Nectar, which attracts insects, is produced by the

(z) Insect
reproductive parts.

The petals are large, enabling the pollen grains to

t3l Wind
collect inside the flower.

The female reproductive part is longer than the

(41 Wind
male reproductive part.

PhD Education I www. phd-:d:.:ca:i3n..om.sg

20. The diagram below shows two uninhabited islands, A and B, which are surrounded by the sea
r-
tn
l.l,

Island A lsland B

Ten years ago, four types ofplants were found growing on Island A but none ofthese was found
growing on Island B. Some characteristics ofthe fruits ofthe four plants found on Island A are
shown in the table below.

Plant Characteristic of the fruit

S Fibrous husk

T Sweet and juicy

U Feathery structures

Dry fruit wall

New plants are now found growing on Island B. Researchers believe that these plants
originated from Island A. Which plant(s) can these possibly be?
(1) S only
(2) T and U only
(3) S,TandUonly
(4) T,UandVonly

21. Which ofthe following best describe the importance ofseed dispersal?
A. To prevent overcrowding
B. To increase the seedling's chances ofsurvival
C. To enable the young plant to obtain enough nutrients from the parent plant
D. To allow the young plant to have the same characteristics as the parent plant
(1) A and B only
(2) B and C only
(31 A,BandConly
(41 A,B,CandD

d PhD Education I www.phd-edacation.com.sg

 2. The diagram shows part ofan island where three types ofplants, * , A and o are growing
C'l
-zC'T Island
A

o
N

The wind direction was northwards. After five years, the number of each type of plant has
increased, as shown in the diagram below.

A
A
A
A
A
f*. Island

A A
A
A o o
A N
A
*t. o
o

How are the fruits or seeds of each type ofplant dispersed?

* A o
(11 Wind Animals SpliBing action

(2) Wind Water Animals

(3) Splitting action Wind Water

{4) Splitting action Animals Water

PhD Education ! www. phd-education.com-sg

 I-
23. A, B, and D are processes occurring in the life rycle ofa planL
F
C

A. Dispersal rc,
B. Fertilisation
C. Pollination
D. Seed germination

Which of the following shows the correct order ofthe processes?

(11 C {2) A

DB C D
tt
\ o*/ B

(3) /--t\ t4) B

/\
DA A C

C D

24. The diagram below shows the development cycle of a plant.

Seedling Adult plant

| 0",.
I
Flowers

Fruits .4
Which ofthe following best represent processes at B?
A. Dispersal
B. Germination
C. Pollination
D. Fertilisation
(1) A and B only
(2) A and C only
(31 C and D only
(4) B and C only

d phD ldJCation www.

I p hd-education.com.sg
-__________-^
(Iresnon z5
g t-.r*. below shows the cross-section ofthe seed ofa bean plant.

Part A

Part B

(aJ Name the labelled Part A. (1 mJ

(bJ What is the function of Part B during germination? [1 m]

[cJ Tick the factors that are required for the germination of the seed. (3 mJ

Factors Put a'r'' ifit is one ofthe factors required for germination

Water

Warmth

Food

Light energy

Question 26
The diagram below shows a flower of Plant W
Bracts

Anther
Stigma

[aJ Based on the above diagram, state the method of dispersal for this flower. [1 m)

[b) Give two reasons for your answer in part [aJ. (2 mJ

P-D Educa Lron I www. phd-ed ucation.Lom

=rd
Ouestion 27 --
C')
The diagram below shows the cross-section ofa flower. (o

(a] For a flower to develop into a fruit, two important processes have to occur. State these
processes. (2 mJ

(b) In the diagram above, label the anther and stigma ofthe flower. (2 m)

Question 28
The diagram below shows the cross-section ofa flower.

B
A

D
c

(a) The table below shows the functions of the different parts of the flower labelled A, B, C, D and E
in the given diagram. Complete the table by writing in the correct letters A, B, C, D and E next to
each function. (2 mJ

Function ofthe flower parts Part

Attracts insects
Protects the ovules
Contains pollen sacs
Catches pollen grains

(b) What change would take place at E several days after the male reproductive cell has fused with
the egg cell? (1 m)

d PhD Eo-cation I www.phd-educalion.com.sg

 29
{
o The diagram below shows the cross-section of a flower

(a) The table below shows two parts of the flower, X and Y, that have similar functions to certain
organs in the human reproductive system.

Parts Similar function to certain organs in the human reproductive system

x Producing sperms
Producing eggs

Label Parts X and Y in the diagram above. [2 mJ

(bJ If Part X is removed from the flower, will the flower still be able to develop into a fruit? Explain
why. [1 mJ

[c) what is the function of Part Z? [1 m)

Ouestion 30
The diagram below shows the cross-section ofthe flower ofa plant
a
P
R

[aJ Which part, P, Q, R or S, performs a similar function as the testis in the human reproductive
system? [1 m]

[b] What would you observe about Part S when the male sex cell fuses with the egg? (1 mJ

P,1D Edu.ation ] www. ph d-ed ucation.com.sg

 f--
Question 31
F{
The picture below shows some pong pong fruits
N

The diagram below shows the location where the first pong pong tree was grown, and the different
possible parts, W, X, Y and Z, ofa river where pong pong trees can be found two years later.

Key
Location offirst pong pong tree
x
--"----> Direction ofwater flow

Y.

z.
[aJ Which is the most unlikely part ofthe river where young pong pong trees can be found? Explain
your answer. (2 m)

(bl The pong pong fruit has a fibrous husk. Explain how this feature enables it to be dispersed by
water. (1 mJ

d ?it idLrcalio:r i www. pld-:d::c::icr.ror:.:f9

--lAucstisn:z
,O. O,r*rr* below-shows two plants, A and B, of the same species. The three arrows, 1, 2 and 3,
-$- show the process ofpollination in plants.

123

Plant A Plant B

[a) Which arrowfsJ show(sJ cross-pollination? (1 mJ

[b] Will the flowers develop into fruits after pollination? Explain your answer. (1 m)

(cJ Put a tick (/] in the appropriate column to indicate if each of the following statements is 'True'
or'False'. [2 m]

statements True False

The flowers of Plants A and B are most likely pollinated by

wind.

It is possible for Plant B to produce fruits even ifall the

anthers ofthe flower are removed.

PhD lducation I www.phd-education.com.sg

 I--
Question 33
(Yt
The table below shows the characteristics of three different plants, Q, R and S
l\
Does it have Can the flower develop Length ofpetals/
Plant
flowers? into a fruit? cm

a Yes No 2.L

R Yes Yes 4.6

s Yes Yes 7.5

(al Cive a possible reason why the flower of Plant Q cannot develop into a fruit. (1 m]

(bJ Which plant can best attract pollinators? Explain your answer. [1 m)

Question 34
Study the following fruits

Rambutan Jackfruit

[aJ Based on the photographs above, what can you conclude about the number of ovules in a
rambutan flower and a jackfruit flower? (1 m)

(b) Explain your answer in part (a). (1 mJ

d PhD :arcation I www. phd-ed ucation.com.sg

-_---_-_r
Theme: Cycles
{
5
6 Reproduction in Humans
1. The table below records some ofthe characteristics of Matt's parents

Mother Father
Height Short Tall
Hair Straight and black Wavy and Brown
Characteristics Dimples No dimples No dimples

Skin Tone Fair Dark

Nose Flat Flat

Which ofthe following descriptions of Matt shows the characteristics that he can inherit from
his parents?

tll Matt is tall, dark and has short hair.

(Z) Matt is short, dark and has a sharp nose.
(3) Matt is tall, fair and has wavy black hair.
t4l Matt is tall, has a sharp nose and has dimples.

2. Study Tim's family tree

Tim

Which one of the following statements about Tim's family is true?

(1) Tim has two aunts.
(2) Tim has two brothers.
t3) Tim has only one uncle.
(4) Tim's mother has a brother

PhD Edu.aaion I www. phd-education.com.sg

3. \,Vhich one of the following characteristics is not passed on from parents to child?
r-
(1) u1
(2)
Rolling tongue into a U-shape
Sleeping pattern
N
(3) Colour of hair
t4l Shape of ears

4. Study the family tree below carefully.

Kevs

Male

Female

Roy

Which of the following statements about the family tree are false?
A. Roy has two siblings.
B. Roy has a total of four uncles.
C. Roy's mother has a sister and a brother.
D, There are more females than males in the family tree.
E. Roy has two aunts from the paternal side ofhis family.

t1) A and C only

(2) only
B and E
t3l B,DandEonly
(4) A,BandConly

5. Which of the following traits can be passed down from one generation to the next?
(11 Height, fingerprints and shapes of earlobes
{z) Dimples, ability to roll tongue and length of fingernails
t3) Colour blindness, length of hair and skin colour
t4) Shape of earlobes, ability to roll tongue and colour blindness

d PhD Education I www. phd-ed ucation.com.sg

---------..
5. Amy drew her family tree as shown in the diagram below
{
O) Straight hair Straight hair

Straight hair Curly hair Keys

Has dimples No dimples
Male

Female

Amy |ohn

Amy has curly hair and does not have dimples. Based on her family tree, which ofthe following
statements are true?
A. John is Amy's cousin.
B. Amy's father has a brother and a sister.
C. Amy inherited her curly hair from her father.
D. The grandparents shown in the family tree are the parents ofAmy's mother.
(1) C only
(2) AandBonly
(3) CandDonly
(41 B, C and D only

7. Study Vicky's family tree as shown below. The family tree shows the members who either have
attached earlobes or detached earlobes.

Vicky

Keys

Male with detached earlohes

o Female with detached earlobes

Male with attached earlobes Female with attached earlobes

Which one of the following statements about the family tree is correct?
(1) Vicky and her brothers have attached earlobes.
(2) Both Vicky's parents have detached earlobes.
(3) Vicky's father has a brother who has detached earlobes.
(4) Both Vicky's grandmothers have attached earlobes.

PhD Education I www.phd-education.com.sg

 I.-
B. The diagram below shows a developing foetus in a mother's womb
F
l\
Cord X

Developing foetus

Which ofthe followinB statements about Cord x are correct?

A. [t connects the foetus to the mother.
B. Fertilisation takes place at Cord X.
C. Waste from the foetus is not passed out through Cord X.
D. It carries food and oxygen from the mother to the foetus
(1) AandBonly
(2) BandConly
(3) AandConly
(4) AandDonly

9. The diagram below shows a sperm cell.

Head
Nucleus

Flagellum

Which one ofthe following correctly states the function ofthe nucleus and flagellum
respectively?

Nucleus Flagellum
(11 Keeps the cell firm Acts as a feeler

(2) Carries genetic materials Controls activities in the cell

(31 Controls activities in the cell Aids in movement

(41 Acts as the centre of the cell Keeps the cell firm

d PhD Educatio.r I www. phd-education.com.sg

.......-.-10.
study the diagram below.
{
cp

Which one ofthe following correctly idenhfies A and B, and where they are produced in the
human reproductive system?

A Where A is produced B Where B is produced

(1) Sperm Penis Sperm Testes
(2) Egg Ovaries Egg Womb
(3) Sperm Testes Egg Ovaries
(4) Eeg Womb Sperm Testes

11. The diagram below shows the reproductive system of a flower, a human male and a human
female.

A
B

D
x
Reproductive system Reproductive system Reproductive system
ofa flower of a human male of a human female

Which of the following represents the parts of the flower which have the same functions as X
and Y respectively?

Male part X Female part Y

(1) C A
(2) B D

t3l D C

(4) A B

PhD Education I www.phd-educaa:on.com.sg

12. The diagram below shows a female reproductive system.
r-
or
L 0 t\

M N

Which of the following statements are true?

A. L provides nutrients to the developing foetus
B. A baby passes through P during childbirth.
C. A fertilised egg will develop into a foetus at O
D. N can still produce eggs ifM is removed.

(1) A and B only

(2) A, C and D only
(3) B, C and D only
t4) A, B, C and D

13. The table below compares the sexual reproduction ofhumans and flowering plants'

Flowering
Humans plants

Part where the male reproductive cells are A B

stored

Part where the male reproductive cell fuses Ovary

C
with the female reproductive cell

Process in which the male reproductive cell Fertilisation D

fuses with the female reproductive cell

Which one ofthe following correctly identifies A, B, C and D?

A B c D

(1) Testis Stigma Womb Pollination

{2) Testis Anther Fallopian tube Fertilisation

t3l Ovary Anther Fallopian tube Pollination

(4) Ovary Stigma Womb Fertilisation

d PhD Fducation I www. phd-ed ucat ion.com sg

--"..""-74.
The table below shows the physical characteristics ofAlfred and his parents, Mr' and Mrs. Lim.
&
o Physical Characteristics

Dimples Earlobes Eyelids Hair Length

Alfted No Attached Single Short

Mr. Lim Yes Detached Single Short

Mrs. Lim No Attached Double Long

How many characteristics did Alfred inherit from his parents?

(1) He inherited one from his father and one from his mother.
(2) He inherited one from his father and two from his mother.
t3l He inherited two from his father and one from his mother.
(4) He inherited two from his father and two from his mother,

15. The diagram below shows Peter's family tree

Keys

Male

Female

The table below shows the physical characteristics of each of Peter's family members, including
Peter.

Physical Characteristics
Attached Single
Dimples Wavy Hair
Earlobes Eyelids
a x x

R x x

s x
T x

U x x
v x x

Peter inherited all his characteristics from one parent. Based on the information above, which
letter, S, T, U or V represents him?
(1) s
(2) r
t3l
(4)
u
v

PaD tdu.aa;on I www. p| d -: d:-.: c a a,* n..o.n sg

.

d
 16. The family tree of the Cheong family is shown below. I-

F,l
lack Emily
Kevs @
Male

Female
Amelia Jessica Tommy Mary

The table below summarises the traits of the family

Physical Characteristics

Brown Hair Blood Type O+ Sharp Nose

fack Yes No Yes

Emily No Yes No

Amelia No No Yes

,essica Yes Yes Yes

Tommy No No No

Mary No Yes No

Which child/ children inherited at least one trait from each ofhis/ her parents?
(1) Tommy only
(2) Mary only
(31 Amelia, Jessica and Tommy only
(4) Amelia, Jessica, Tommy and Mary

I www.phd-education.com.sg
a[-il;;;;;;ir;;
 The dia gram below shows Ben's family tree
E
N
-17.

Ben

Keys

Male
Erglt Female
Male with freckles
EIII
@ Female with curly hair
ffi Male with curly hair

Based on the information above, which ofthe following statements are true?
A. Ben has three aunties.
B. Ben's sister will definitely bear a daughter with curly hair.
C. Ben's mother inherited the genes for curly hair from his maternal grandfather.
D. The gene that causes freckles only affects the male members ofthe family.

t1) A and C only

(2) B and D only
(31 A and D only
(4) A,BandDonly

18. The diagram below shows how certain traits are passed on from parents to young.
Mr. Ng Mrs. Ng
Curly hair Straight hair
Dark skin Fair skin

Maria Keith Pauline William

Curly hair Curly hair Straight hair Straight hair
Fair skin Dark skin Fair skin Dark skin

Which of their children inherited one trait from each parent?

A. Maria
B. Pauline
C. William
D. Keith
t1) AandB
(2) AandC
(31 BandD
(4) CandD

PhD Education I www.phd edu.aaion.co.:.sg

19. The diagram below shows Lydia's family tree
r-
(n
(t

Lydia

Keys

Male Female

Male with facial dimples o Female with facial dimples

Which of the following about Lydia's family is true?

(1) Lydia has two uncles altogether.
(2) Lydia's facial dimples trait came from her father.
t3) Lydia's paternal grandmother has facial dimples.
t4l Lydia is the only one in her family with facial dimples.

20. Study the family tree oflack below.

Jack

Kevs

Male with sharp nose Female with sharp nose

Male with flat nose o Female with flat nose

Which of the following statements are correct?

A. lack has three brothers.
B. Jack's aunt has a sharp nose.
C. Jack's grandmother has a flat nose.
(1) A and B only
(2) only
B and C
t3) A and only
C
(4) A,BandC

d PhD Education I www. phd-educatiox.com sg

_----_-^
t,ltesnon z I

B;**"- below shows two types of reproductive cells, X and Y

r Cell X

Cell Y

,--P
(a) Fill in the boxes with suitable word(sJ to compare Cell X and Cell Y. [2 mJ

Cell X Cell Y

Part that produces it

Number of cells released at a time

(b) Name the process that is shown in the above diagram. (1 m)

Question 22
(aJ Draw the human male and female reproductive cells in the space provided below. (1 mJ

Male Reproductive Cell Female Reproductive Cell

[bJ State a difference in the physical characteristic between the two cells and give a reason for it.
(2 m)

(c) Put a tick (/) in the appropriate column to indicate if each of the following statements is ,True,
or'False'. (2 mJ

Statements True False

The egg is fertilised by many sperms.
The egg is the largest cell in the human body.

PhD Educ.aion I www.phdredlcation.com.sg

 r-
Question 23
The diagram below shows Dan's paternal family tree.
rrl
@
Dan's Grandparents

Cousin Amelia

Keys

Male with blue eyes Female with blue eyes

Male with brown eyes o Female with brown eyes

(a) Complete Dan's family tree by drawing and labelling in the diagram to show Dan and his
younger sister. Both ofthem have blue eyes. [1 m)
(b) Cross (x] out the symbol on the family tree above that represents Dan's single aunt. [% m]
(c) Circle the symbol on the family tree above to show from whom Amelia got her brown eyes.
('hm)

Question 24
The diagrams below show the male and female human reproductive systems.

Front view ofthe male Front view ofthe female

reproductive system reproductive system

(a) Use a pencil to shade the parts that produce the male reproductive cells. (1 m)

(b) Mark a 'X'at the place where a foetus develops. (1 m)

d PhD :ducation I www.phd-eriacation.com.sg

-_-----_'-^
uuesnon z5

R' Stray tf," aiagram below that shows Mike's paternal family tree. A brief description of the physical
- characteristics of the different family members is given.

Mike's Grandparents

Cousin Paul

Kevs

Male with detached earlobes Female with detached earlobes

Male with attached earlobes

o Female with attached earlobes

(aJ Mike has attached earlobes. Using a ruler and a pencil, draw and label a symbol to represent
Mike in his correct position in the family tree. (1 ml
(bJ Put a cross (xJ on the symbol on the family tree above that represents Mike's uncle. (1 mJ
(c) Mike's cousin, Paul, was puzzled that he has attached earlobes although both his parents have
detached earlobes. Based on the family tree above, who could Paul have inherited his attached
earlobes from? Give a reason for your answer. [1 m)

Question 26
Fill in the boxes with suitable word(s] to compare the male reproductive systems of a human and a
hibiscus plant. (2 m)

Human Hibiscus Plant

Part that produces the male sex cell (a ) Anther

Name of male sex cell Sperm tbl

PhD Education I www.phd-education.com.sg

 I-
Theme: Cycles
F
6
7 Changes of State
1. Timothy filled two identical cups, X and Y, with hot coffee and cold coffee respectively. He then
covered each cup with an identical steel plate as shown in the diagram below. The two cups
were then left in the same room.
Steel plate Water droplets

Water droplets

Hot coffee Insulation Cold coffee

Cup X Cup Y

After three minutes, Timothy recorded his observations and concluded the following:
A. Heat loss and heat gain from the surroundings were reduced as the cups were
insulated.
B. The hot water vapour in Cup X condensed on the hotter under surface of the steel plate
C. The water vapour in the surrounding air condensed on the cooler top surface ofthe
steel plate placed over Cup Y.
D. The water vapour in the surrounding air does not condense on the top surface ofthe
steel plate placed over Cup X as the water vapour in the surrounding air is cooler than
the surface ofthe steel plate.
Which of the above statements are correct?
(1) A and B only
(2) C and D only
t3l A,BandConly
(4) A,CandDonly

2. Darren left three blocks of ice, X, Y and Z, of different sizes to melt in the same place.

Which one of the following statements is correct?

(1) X has the same temperature as Y and Z.
{2) Y is at a lower temperature than Z but at a higher temperature than X
(3) X is at the lowest temperature as compared to Y and Z.
(41 Z is at the lowest temperature as compared to X and Y.

d';
hD Education I www.phd-education.com.sg
-.-3
o
s
The graph below shows what happens when some ice cubes are heated until boiling is
completed.

Temperature/ 'C

100

Time
ABi c D

Which one ofthe following shows the correct state ofwater in parts A, B, C and D ofthe graph?

A B C D

t1) Solid and liquid Liquid Liquid Gas

(2) Solid Solid and liquid Liquid Liquid and gas

(3) Liquid Solid Solid and gas Liquid
(4) Solid and gas Gas Liquid and gas Solid and gas

4. The table below shows the melting points and boiling points of substances p, Q and R
respectively.
Substance Melting point/ 'C Boiling point/ 'C
P 4l 83

a 27 66
R 58 95

At which one ofthe following temperatures are the three substances p, Q and R, in the same
state?
(1) 32"C
(2) 49 "C
(3) 60'c
t4l 81 "C

PhD Educalion I www. phd-education.com.sg

5. Henry placed a jug of boiling water on a table to cool down. When the water reached room
temperature for some time, he added some ice cubes to the jug. The graph below shows his o)
measurement of the temperature of the iug of water with time. -@
Temperature/'C

100

32

0 Time/ min
30 45 50

Which of the following statements below are correct?

A. Ice cubes were added to the water 45 minutes after the start ofthe experiment.
B. The jug ofwater took 30 minutes to cool down to room temperature.
C. The water in the jug became ice between the 45th and 50th minute.
D. Condensation took place in the first 30 minutes only.

t1) A and B only

(2) B and D only
(31 A,BandConly
(4) B,CandDonly

6. The diagram below shows a set-up in which water changes from one state to another.

Glass panel at 28 'C

oC
Water at 85

Which one of the following will most likely result in an increase in the amount of water droplets
formed on the glass panel?
A. Add ice into the water
B. Use a cooler glass Panel
C. Increase the temperature ofthe water
D. Place a fan in front ofthe set-up
(1) B and C only
(2) A and D only
(3) B,CandDonly
(4) A,BandDonly

d ?hD Education I www. phd-education.com sg

 William dried three identical towels containing the same amount of water on the balcony. Each
(o
o
-T
towel was folded to expose a different surface area. After six hours, each towel was weighed. He
recorded his results and plotted them on a graph.
v

Which one ofthe following pairs oflabels is most suitable for the x- and y-axis ofthe graph he
plotted with his results?

y-axrs x-axrs
(1) Mass of towels Surface area of towels
(z) Time taken Surface area of towels
(31 Surface area of towels Time taken
(4) Mass of towels Time taken

8. A piece of wax at room temperature was heated slowly in an evaporating dish. Its temperature
was recorded at regular intervals and plofted in a graph as shown below.

Temperature/ "C

Time/ min

Which one of the following statements correctly describes the temperature marked y?

t1) Y the
is room temperature.
{2) Y the
is boiling point of r}e wax.
(3) Y the
is temperature at which all the wax change from the solid state to the liquid state
(4) Y the
is temperature at which all the wax change from the gaseous state to tha liquid
state.

PhD Education I www.phd-education.com.sg

9. An experiment was set up as shown in the diagram below
--
F{
Test tube ctr
Ice

Water

Beaker

After fifteen minutes, which of the following are likely to have changed?
A. State of ice in the beaker
B. State ofwater in the test tube
C. Temperature ofice in beaker
D. Temperature ofwater in the test tube
t1l AandDonly
(2) BandConly
t3) A, C and D only
(4) A, B, C and D

10. The table shows the boiling and melting points of four different substances, P, q R and S

Substance Boiling point/ 'C Melting point/ "C

P Z4 5

o 70 15

R 105 23
S L7B 50

Which ofthe substances (P, Q R and S) are in the liquid state at room temperature of 30 'C?

t1l PandSonly
(2) QandRonly
t3l P, Q and R only
t4l P,qRandS

?hD adrca:i!.1 j www.phd-ed:-:ca!i<:.':.*rn.3g

 Four identical wet towels, W, x, Y and Z, were left to dry in four places with different conditions
(o for half a day as shown in the table below
N
-11.
Towel Condition
Sunny and windy

x Sunny and not windy

Y Shady and windy

Z Shady and not windy

Which one of the following graphs is most likely to show the mass of the wet towels after half a
day?
(11 Towel (2) Towel

Z Z

Y Y

x x

Mass/ g Mass/ g
0 2 4 6 8 10 72 o 2 4 6 810 12

(31 Towel t4l Towel

z Z

x x

Mass/ g Mass/ g
0 2 4 6 810 1,2 024681072

PhD Education I www. phd-ed ucation.com.sg

12. The table below shows the melting and boiling points of five substances, K, L, M and N
J,
(n
Substance Melting point/ 'C Boiling point/ 'C - C'l
1
-25 46

K 0 100

L 13 737

M -12 155

N 10 720

Which ofthe substances are liquids at 5 "C?

t1l land M only

(2) K and N only
t3l K, L and M only
(4) J, K and M only

13. The table below shows the melting and boiling points ofSubstances P, Q and R

Substance Melting point/ "C Boiling point/ "C

P 42 7B

a 28 63

R 54 90

At which one ofthe following temperatures are the three substances in the same state?

t1l 30'c
(2) 49 "C
i3) 60'c
(4) 80 'c
14. The table below shows the boiling and melting points ofthree substances, A, B and C.

A D
Substances C

Boiling point/ "C 1B 125 65

Melting point/ 'C 2 45 15

State at room temperature of 30 'C x Y Z

What is the state ofthe substances, A, B and C, at room temperature?

x Y z
t1l Gas Liquid Solid

(z) Liquid Solid Gas

(31 Gas Solid Liquid

(4) Solid Gas Liquid

d PhD :'c-1.'rt,on I wwrv.o;tl ,,'1-ca1io1.corr sP

 15. A. B and c represent the three sta tes of water. Which two arrows indicate melting and freezing
\O resnectivelv?
-5 P R

Heat loss Heat gain

Heat gain Heat loss

a S

Melting Freezing

t1) P a
(2) a P

t3l R S

t4j S R

16. A pot of tap water was heated till it boiled. After the water has boiled for some time, it was
placed on the table and allowed to cool. Which ofthe following best shows the changes in the
temperature of the water?

t1) Temperature/ "c (2) Temperature/ oC

100 100

Time/ min Time/ min

15 30 45 60 15 30 45 60

t3l Temperature/ oC
t4l Temperature/ oC

100 100

Time/ min Time/ min

15 30 45 60 15 30 45 60

P,1D Education I www. phd-ed ucation.com.sg

17. A beaker was filled with 100 ml ofwater and covered with a piece ofcardboard as shown in the-
diagram below. The beaker was then put into the freezer. AftLr a day, the water had turned to lrl
ice. Without removing the piece of cardboard, the volume of the ice was noted. The beaker of O)
ice was then left to melt completely.

Piece ofcardboard

Which of the following possibly indicates the volume of the ice right after the beaker was taken
out ofthe freezer and the volume ofthe water after all the ice had melted?

Volume ofice right after the beaker Volume of the water

was taken out ofthe freezer after all the ice had melted
(1) 100 ml 80 ml
(2) 100 ml 100 ml
(31 110 ml 110 ml
(41 110 ml 100 ml

18. rvVhich of the following will change when water freezes?

A. State
B. Mass
C. Volume
D. Temperature
(1) A,BandConly
t2) A,CandDonly
t3) B,CandDonly
t4) A,B,CandD

hD I c-c,rlr : r J l,,ww.phd eoJcdtron.com.se

----------
Question 19
(o
The graph below shows the temperature changes ofSubstance Q when it is heated.
or
oC
Temperature/
lallllllllrllllllllll ll llll
lall II lll
I T'TTTITITITTT'TITI It lll
I lll lllllllrllt arll lrt tllt I tll
I all lllllalllll llll lll llll
llll III lllr I lll I ltt
I III trtlalallll
80 t rtl ltt rtl I ITT tl lllrl llll I ttr
t lll llt llr
TTI ttl I all
I lll llla ltlal
lEl tlll lttr
I I
I lll
I llr
I lal
IT
tll
rtl II
ltl
ltl
la
ll
T'
ll T IT
ll I !a tl
ll a tt
!lI!
II lllr.
I TI II lltf/t ttaa
alrl
laaa itE
!
I
I
ll
ll
rtt
ltl
I I !l t!ttr lt tll
ll Ilt,ll ll alt ll
af
60 I ttl lt ll llr II II llt lrttllll ltl ll
I tla lt.I It
T ttt TI lar ll I lll llrlltll
lrl II I tal ll,.lllltl
ll ttIT
ltTT II
I !t la ltl tt I lal I Irttatlt
I lt ll lll llta I lll I a7/IlIllI It
I at la
I TI IT ITTTITITTTIT'TTT"ITIT'I
TIT I laa I rtrlltrl lttt tlII
lt
ll tt It rll I ,ltt I r!l ll
ll ll ll lll llt rlt a all I lla ll
ll
ll
ll lll I ttl I ttt It ll
40 tl
ll
tlr
lll
la
la ttt
Itl It
IT a a tt t t ll I al
ltl t lt I I lt I It
!l
ll
lll TI ITT T TT I T T' I ll TI
ltl lll IIT I a a ll I tlt I lt
ltl ltt aar I I ll I TIT I ll
ttl lll TTI I , I ta I ttl T t! tl
lll
all lll
lll all
lal III
lll
.J I I
att I I
I lrl I lt ll
I all I ll .T
ttlr
llal llll
ITITTTITTTTIT'T'IITITTTITITITTT
rll lll I tl t lll tll I llt
TT I
I
20 tlra lltt IT' rtll I lt I lll lll I lll I
I llll aar'/ I TI I llt
I tllt
I ttta 2aal
I aaaa tall ll
I aa2a lltl
aaat B
ltll
IT'
llt
lll iE T!
tl I lllI ltt
It I TI I .T all I arl ll
ltll II tt
tll I lll
ttt I ttt lt
lll I tla II
!tr
a

I aaaa llll II II ltl I

I It
lt
I llll rlt I TT I II
I
I Ei
I lall llll
!tll
lrll rll
llt
laa llll
tl lll
llt
lll
tlr
lll
tlllllr
rlllrla
all lllllll
ll
ll
ll Time/min
0 5 10 15 20

(a) Which part[s] ofthe graph, AB, BC, CD, DE, represent(s) a change in the state ofSubstance Q?
(1 mJ

(bl What is the state ofSubstance Q at 40 "C? [1 m]

Question 20
Betty breathed into a mirror and noticed a "mist" forming on the surface ofthe mirror.
(a) Explain how the "mist" was formed. (1 mJ

(b) As Betty continued to breathe repeatedly onto the mirror, she observed that the "mist' could no
longer be formed. Explain her observation. (1 m)

lal] Ed!calion I www. phd-ed:cal:...com.sg

Question 21
Some Liquid Z was heated from room temperature for 10 minutes. The temperature ofthe liquid
N
was measured every 2 minutes. The results are presented below. - o)
oC
Temperature/

Time/ min
0 2 4 6 8 10

(a) tfthe room temperature was 20 'C and the boiling point ofLiquid Z was 80 "C, mark and label
the two temperatures in the graph above. [2 mJ

(b] If Liquid throughout the experiment, suggest a possible reason for the change in
Z was heated
temperature between the 8th and 10th minute. (1 m]

Question 22
Look at the following graphical represenhtion of changes ofstates of Substances R and S from a
solid to a liquid to a gas.
Temperature

Substance R

:r
Substance S

t xev

- ' - Change ofstates

Time

(a) What form of energy was required for the changes ofstate in both substances? [1 mJ

(b) What would be the states of Substances R and S at Temperature P? (2 mJ

Substance R:
Substance S:

PhD :dr.ation I www.phd-ed ucation.com.sg

-_.ro Question 23

s 200 ml of blue coloured water was mixed with 200 ml of red coloured water. 10 g of common salt
was then dissolved into the mixture. The mixture was then heated.
Funnel

Liquid X

Beaker

10 g of salt dissolved in a mixture of

blue and red coloured water

rtt
Heat

Droplets ofLiquid X were formed on the sides ofthe funnel during the heating

[aJ How was Liquid X formed? (2 m]

(bJ What is the colour and taste of Liquid X? (1 mJ

(cJ After heating the mixture for 10 minutes, there was only 200 ml of the mixture left in the
beaker. What is the mass of the salt in the beaker now? (1 mJ

Question 24
There are five set-ups, V, W, X, Y and Z. Two different fair tests are conducted to find out the factors
affecting the rate of evaporation ofwater.

Set-up x Y

Volume of water/ ml 400 200 200 400 200

Temperature of water/ "C 30 55 35 30 60

Exposed surface areaf cmz 10 15 10 15 10

(aJ What would be the aim of the fair test if Set-ups V and Y are used? (1 m)

[b] Ifthe aim ofthe experiment is to find out whether the temperature of water affects the rate of
evaporation, which two other set-ups should be used? [1 m)

PID Education I www.phd ed]'.:caliln.com.sg

 Question 25
A container ofice cubes is heated until boiling occurs. The flame is then turned offand the contents
gr
in the container are left to cool. The temperature in the container is measured at Z minute intervals - CN
for 40 minutes and the graph is plotted as shown below.

Temperature/ oC

C. D

,
,
,
,
E F
x
A B
Time/ min
o 4 8 L2 1620 24 28 32 36 40

(aJ Mark 100 "C on the axis ofthe graph. (1 ml

(b) Why does the temperature ofwater remain constant at EF? (1 ml

[c) Determine the heat change at each section ofthe graph by putting a tick (/J in the appropriate
boxes in the table below. (2 mJ

Heat Lost Heat gained Heat is neither lost nor gained

AB

BC

DE

EF

(d) Compare the amount ofwater at CD and EF. Explain your answer. [1 mJ

d Pl:D Education I www. phd-education.com.sg

 .t:-

---------..
Question 26
F
o
o
An experiment is conducted to find out which set-up of water would take the longest time to boil.
Three set-ups are as sholrm in the diagram below.

100 ml water + 10 g salt

50 ml water

l00mlwater+5gsalt
;

ttr
Heat
ttt
Heat
ttt
Heat

Set-up E Set-up F Set-up G

[aJ Which set-up will take the longest time to boil? Explain your answer. (1 mJ

(b) It is pointed out that it is not a fair test. Why? [2 m)

Question 27
A glass ofwater with ice cubes in it was left on the dining table. After a few minutes, the exterior
surface ofthe glass was wet.

Ice
^.
Water

Explain what had caused the exterior surface ofthe glass to be wet. (2 m)

PID Edu.;tion I www.phd-edrcaa:on.com.sg

d
Question 28 ---FI
Containers A and B are filled with the same amount ofwater. Both containers are placed near a
window and the amount ofwater evaporated from each container is monitored over a period of
o
F.
time.

B
A

Line A in the graph below shows the relationship between the time and the amount of water
evaporated from Container A.
Amount ofwater evaporated/ ml
A

Time/ min

(a) In the graph above, draw and label line

B that shows the relationship between the hme and the
amount of water evaporated from Container B. (1 mJ

(bJ Another experiment is carried out by filling Container X and Container Y with the same amount
ofwater and both containers are placed under a fan.

Container Y
Container X

It is observed that the water in Container x evaporated completely before the water in
Container Y does. Give a reason for the observation. (1 mJ

d PhD Edlcat:rn I www.phd-e*L;cation.com.sg

___________-
Ouestion 29
H
o
N
Some ice cubes were taken out from a freezer and heated in a beaker over a gas stove. After a while,
the heating was stopped and the beaker was removed from the gas stove. Subsequently, the beaker
was placed into the refrigerator. The changes in the temperature of the contents in the beaker are
plotted on a graph.
oC
Temperature/

80
D
70
60
E
50
40
30
20
F
10
B C
0 Time/ min
A t 2 3 4 5 6 7I910
^\
[aJ Name the process that is taking place along the line BC. (1 m)

(bl At which point on the graph was the beaker placed into the refrigerator? Explain your answer.
[1 m)

Question 30
An experiment is set up as shown in the diagram below

Test tube Thermometer

2 ml of water

Crushed ice and 5 g ofsalt

The aim is to find out ifthe amount ofsalt added to ice affects the time taken for the water in the
test tube to freeze. Draw and label the control set-up to be used. [2 m)

PhD Edr..llon I www-3lC-ed ucatian.com.sg

Question 31
r-
m
An experiment is conducted to find out the factors affecting the rate of evaporation of water. There
are seven set-ups, P, Q R, S, T, U and V, using containers ofthe same material. Two different tests o
FI
are conducted with three set-ups each time. The table below provides details on the set-ups that
are used in the experiment.

Set-up P a R s T U

Volume of water/ ml 400 200 400 200 200 400 200

Temperature of water/ "C 30 55 30 35 60 30 70
Exposed surface area/ cm2 100 150 150 150 100 200 150

(a) What would be the aim of one of the tests if Set-ups P, R and U are used? (1 m]

(bJ If the aim of the experiment is to find out whether the temperature of water affected the rate of
its evaporation, which three set-ups could be used? (1 mJ

[c) What other variable should be kept constant when conducting the experiment? [1 m]

Question 32
Uncle Mike bought some piping hot chicken pies from the caf6. The chicken pies were placed in a
sg/rofoam box and closed. The diagram below shows the side view When he reached his office ten
minutes later, he found water droplets on the top inner surface ofthe styrofoam box as he opened
the box.

Water droplets

Hot chicken pie

Side view of styrofoam box

[a) Explain clearly where the water droplets had come from. (2 m)

[bJ The following week, Uncle Mike bought similar chicken pies from the caf6. He found that a piece
ofpaper was placed over the pies. Give a reason to explain why the piece of water was placed
over the pies. (1 m)

D Education I xww. phC-:d:c:iicn.conr.sg

 Uncle Mike went to another caf6 to buy chicken pies. He found that some holes were poked
E through the top cover ofthe styrofoam box containing the chicken pies. Explain why holes were
-(.1
sA pokeJthrough the top cover oi the styrofoam box. (1 m)

Question 33
A group ofpupils carried out an investigation on evaporation. They filted containers with 500 ml of i
water each and placed them under light sources of different intensities. The amount of water left in
the container was checked after two hours and their results are recorded in the table as shown
below.

Light intensity/ lux Amount of water left/ ml

200 475
400 450
600 350

800 275

1000 50

[a] Based on the data given in the table, draw a line graph. (2 mJ
Amount of water left/ ml

500
450
400
350 I
300
250
200
150
100
50

0 200 400 600 800 1000 Light intensity/ lux

[bJ What is the relationship between the amount ofwater left in the container and the light
intensity? [1 m]

li'rD Edu.ation ! www. ph d'edrcatil]n..om.sg

 Theme: Cycles
1n
- o
B The Water Cycle F{

1. Study the water cycle shown below carefully.

Condensation

Evaporation Water

What do P, Q and R in the water cycle above represent?

P a R

(1) Rain Clouds Water vapour

{2) Clouds Rain Water vapour

(31 Water vapour Clouds Rain

t4l Water vapour Rain Clouds

2. The diagram below shows the water cycle.

T
Water hodies such
Rain as the sea, rivers
and lakes
Clouds

U
S

Water
vapour

Which ofthe following best represents Processes S, T and U?

s T U

(1) Evaporation Precipitation Condensation

(2) Precipitation Condensation Evaporation

(3) Evaporation Condensation Precipitation

(4) Condensation Precipitation Evaporation

d PhD Education I www.phd-education.com.sg

-------
3. Which of the following are examples of reusing water?
H
o
C']
A.
B.
Using rinsing water from the washing machine to wash the floor.
Doing the laundry when the load is full.
C. Removing waste materials from water and using the purified water to cool machines in
factories.
D. Watering plants with water that had been used to rinse rice.
1) A and B only
2) A and D only
3) B and C only
4) A,B,CandD

4. The diagram below shows the three states of water. W, X, Y and Z represent four different
processes.

Y
Ice Water Water vapour
x Z

Which one ofthe following correctly indicates whether heat is gained or lost during the
processes W, X, Y and Z?

w x Y 7.

t1l Heat is gained. Heat is lost. Heat is gained Heat is lost.

(2) Heat is gained. Heat is lost. Heat is lost. Heat is gained
(3) Heat is lost Heat is gained Heat is gained Heat is lost.
(41 Heat is lost Heat is gained. Heat is lost Heat is gained

5. Michelle wants to reduce water consumption at home. She made the following list. Which of the
following actions below will help her to reduce water consumption?
A. Washing dishes under a running tap.
B. Using a water hose to wash her car.
C. Using a mug ofwater when brushing teeth.
D. Reusing the water from washing vegetables to water plants.

(u A and C only
{2) C and D only
(3) A,BandDonly
(41 A,B,CandD

PhD Education I www. phd-ed ucation.conr.sg

d
6. udy prepared a set-up as shown in the diagram below to show how the water cycle works.
--
h
f

lce (,
rr{
Plastic sheet
\ t\ Water droplets

oC
Water at 100

Which part ofher set-up represents the clouds in the water cycle below?

Rain

Clouds

Sea

(1) Ice
(2) Water droplets
(3) Plastic sheet
(4) Water at 100 "C

7. The diagram below represents the water cycle

Clouds
Process Y Process Z

Water vapour Rain

Process X
Water bodies

Based on the diagram, which of the statements are false?

A. Process X takes place only during the daytime.

B. Heat is lost by the water vapour during Process Y.
C. There is a change in state ofwater during Processes X, Y and Z

t1l A and B only

(2) A and C only
(31 B and C only
(41 A,BandC
?hD Education I www. phd-educatio.).rtm.:g
_""_""___'_r
B. The diagram below shows the water cycle.
H
o
s Process A
Clouds
Process B
:

Water vapour Rain

Process D Process C

Water bodies

Which processes, A, B, C and/or D, involve(sJ a change in the state ofwater?

t1) A only
(2) AandDonly
(3) CandDonly
t4l A, B and D only

9. The water cycle on Earth can take place repeatedly because water

oC
A. freezes at O and boils at 100 "C
B. has volume and is not compressible
C. is essential for the survival of living things
D. can change from one state to another when it gains or loses heat

t1l A only
(2) D only
t3) A,CandDonly
(41 A,B,CandD

:
piD !ducation I www.pld-education.conl-sg
d ,^

;
Question 10
--
o)
A solar still is a simple set-up used to treat water and make it drinkable. The diagram below shows
a solar still which is useful during fishing trips on a boat. The user iust needs to place the solar still o
F{
on the surface ofthe seawater.

Transparent dome

Rim

Drinkable water
Seawater collector

Explain how drinkable water is obtained from seawater using the solar still shown above. [2 m)

Question 11
Study the water rycle shown below.

P
Clouds a

Rain Water vapour

Rivers

Seas

Plants

PhD tducation I www. phd-eoucation.com.58

 Draw two arrows in the diagram above to show how plants can be part of this water cycle'
ll '-trm)
F
-[al
O Ol \,Vhich of the process(esJ above represented by letters P, O & S or T involve(sl no change in
state? (1 ml

(c] \,Vhich ofthe process(esJ above represented by letters P, Q R S or T involve[s] a change fiom a
gaseous state to a liquid state? [1 m)

[dJ How does the greenhouse effect help in the water cycle process? (1 m)

Question 12
An empty glass beaker was placed in a basin containing some seawater. The basin was completely
covered with a plastic sheet and then put in the sun.
\l
Sun
-
Pebble
Basin Droplets ofliquid

Beaker Plastic sheet

Seawater Liquid

Ground

After a period of time, droplets ofliquid were formed on the plastic sheet and some ofit was
collected in the empty beaker.

[a] Describe the colour and taste ofthe liquid in the beaker. [1 m)

(bJ Explain how the liquid droplets were formed on the plastic sheet. [2 mJ

PiD Edu.ation I www. phd'edr.;cali3n..or11-:g

d
Question 13 --p{
The following experimental set-up was placed at the window.
FI
Plastic sheet F{
Pebble

Glass trough

Dish A Dish B
Equal amount of
salt water

(a) Explain why there is less water in Dish A compared to Dish B after two days. (1 mJ

[b) Explain how water is collected at the bottom of the trough after two days. [1 mJ

PhD ¤ducal:o. I www.phd-education.com.sg

 Theme: Systems
---.
H
H,
N I Plant Systems
:
1. The diagram below shows a plant.

Which ofthe following statements about the parts ofthe plant are correct?
A. The stem helps the plant remain upright.
B. The roots take in food and water from the soil.
C. The roots spread out to reach for water and minerals.
D. The leaves spread out to receive sunlight, air and water.

t1l AandConly
lZ) A, B and C only
t3l A, C and D only i
(4) All ofthe above

2. The diagram below shows materials which are needed for survival being transported inside a
plant.

rcy
ll From leaves
..
From roots

Which body system performs this function in humans?

(1) Skeletal system
(Z) Digestive system
(31 Circulatory system
t4l Respiratory system

PhD Educaaion I www.phd-education.com.sg

 3. The diagram shows a part of the potato plant. f--

(n
r{
F{

Which of the following are the functions of Part X?

A. To take in water for the plant.
B. To help the plant to reproduce.
C. To take in nutrients from the soil.
D. To store excess food made bythe plant.
(1) A and C only
(2) B and C only
t3l A and D only
(4) B and D only

4. Two plots of land, side by side and of the same size, were chosen. The same quality of soil was
also found on the tlvo plots. One plot of land was planted with rows ofTree A and the other plot
of land was planted with rows of Tree B. However, after two years, it was found that the land
planted with Tree A was extensively eroded.

Tree A Tree B

Based on the information given above only, which ofthe following is/are the possible
answer(s) to explain the phenomenon?
A. Tree B is less able to shelter the soil from the rain than Tree A.
B. There was heavier rain on the plot of land that Tree A was planted.
C. The roots ofTree B grow deeper into the ground thereby preventing soil erosion

t1l C only
tZ) B only
t3l AandConly
t4l BandConly

d ?hD adrrall.r I xww. phC'education.com.sg

_'__'______r-
Study the diagram ofan onion bulb shown below
ts ..
H, P

5 o
i
R
s

Which one of the labelled parts provides the young plant with food?
t1l P
(2) a
(3) R
t4l s

6. Study the diagrams below

Ginger Onion

Based on your observations, how are the plant parts alike?

A. Both are underground stems.

B. Both have plant parts which store food.
C. Both are used to reproduce new plants.
(11 A only
(2) AandBonly
(3) BandConly
(41 A, B and C

7. Which of the following are possible functions of the non-woody stems in plants?
A. Transport food
B. Transport water
C. Support the plant upright
(11 AandBonly
(2) C only
(3) AandConly
t4l A, B and C

PaD Edu.aa:on I www-phd-ed:.:cation

 8. The diagram below shows a plant growing in the garden E-
tt)
F{
F{
Wooden pole

Fruit

Which of the following is true about a process involved by the plant?

Process Product Factors needed for the process

t1l Evaporation Water Light carbon dioxide

Water, carbon
{2) Respiration Oxygen, glucose
dioxide, energy
(31 Decomposition Carbon dioxide Light, oxygen
(41 Photosynthesis Water, sugar Oxygen, chlorophyll

9. The diagram below shows tiny openings called stomata found on the underside of leaves

Tiny openings

Which of the following are the functions of stomata?

A. They allow excess water vapour to escape.
B. They help to trap sunlight for photosynthesis.
C. They enable the exchange ofgases to take place.
D. They allow the movement ofmineral salts in and out ofthe openings.
(1 A and C only
{2 B and D only
(3 A,BandConly
(4 B,CandDonly

toucatron I www.phd-eouuatlon.com.sg
d;;D
 which two arrows represent the transportation of food made by the plant? ^.
H
P
-10. Leaves

C'T A C

Stem
;
B D

Roots

t1l AandB
(2) AandD
(3) BandC
t4l CandD

11. A 1 cm thick outer ring is removed from a plant at X. Another ring which is 2 cm thick is also
removed from the same plant at Y. A few days later, it is noticed that the leaves above Y began
to turn yellow while the leaves between x and Y remained green.

2 cm outer ring removed----Y

1 cm outer ring removed ---- X / ,

(__,
H I

Soil

Which of the following statements best explains the observation?

(11 The water-carrying tubes cannot carry water to all the leaves above Y.
{2) The water-carrying tubes cannot carry water to all the leaves below X.
t3l The food-carrying tubes cannot carry food to all the leaves above Y.
t4l The food-carrying tubes cannot carry food to all the leaves.

PhD Educat:on I www.qhd-education.com.sg

 12. A plant was placed in a bell jar under the light as shown below. Due to the reaction between
---
Substance X and carbon dioxide that are present in the air in the belljar, the food made by the N
plant had Substance X in it after a few hours. r{
Light
F{

Carbon dioxide and Sutrstance X

When thin slices were cut from the stem ofthe plant and placed on a photographic film, the
parts that had food containing Substance X became black. Which one ofthe following diagrams
shows the areas that had turned black correctly?

i1l (2) (3) t4l

c 0 a g
O(l CD (o O' o O
e 0 a I
13. A small and thin ring ofbark is removed from a plant growing in an open field. A few days later,
a swelling above the ring ofbark that was removed was noted.

Swelling
Ring of bark removed

Which statement correctly explains the presence ofthe swelling?

(1) Food travelling down the stem was trapped above the ring.
(2) Water travelling up the stem was trapped above the ring.
(3) Food travelling up the stem was trapped above the ring.
(4) Water travelling down the stem was trapped above the ring.

d PhD Education I www, phd-ed ucation.com. sg

--1 4. An experiment is conducted to find out whether Plant X or Plant Y takes in more water
ts X
ts Plant Plant Y

&

A D

Water with a Water without

Iayer of oil oil

Which pair ofthe above set-ups is the most suitable for conducting the experiment?
(11 A and B
(2) C and D
(3) A and C
(41 A and D

15. A plant which is placed under the sun is watered daily. A cross-section of its stem is shown
below.

V H

6 G

Which substances are transported by Parts G and H of the stem respectively?

G H

i1l Water and dissolved mineral salts Food

{2) Food Water and dissolved mineral salts

t3l Food and carbon dioxide Water and oxygen

i4l Water and oxygen Food and carbon dioxide

P,1D lducation I www. phd-edr."rcaaicn.coir.:g

16. The diagram below shows how sugar and water are transported to and from different parts of a[-
plant. (n
Fruit A
FI
F{
Key
B Sugar

Water
c

Which one ofthe following shows correctly the parts ofthe plant that are represented by A, B
and C?

A B c
(1) Leaves Stems Roots
(2) Stems Roots Leaves

(31 Roots Stems Leaves

t4l Roots Leaves Stems

PhD Education I www. qhd-ed:.:ca1ion.:om.sg

 7
ts
N The diagram below shows a brin)al plant.
o
B C

A
D

[aJ Which part of the plant will enable it to ensure the survival of its kind? Give a reason for your
answer. (1 m)

[b) State and explain what may happen to the plant ifhalfofthe leaves are eaten by caterpillars?
(1 ml

Question 18
Timothy wishes to find out how much water Plant T loses over 24 hours through transpiration. He
is given Plant T and a weighing scale as shown below.

Plant T

fair experiment with iust the two items shown above.

He would not be able to conduct a

[aJ What else would Timothy need to conduct the experiment? Explain your answer. [2 m]

[b) What are the steps that Timothy should take to find out how much water Plant T loses in 24
hours? (3 ml
Step 1:
Step 2:
Step 3:

PhD Educaalon I www. phd-ed ucation.con.r.i:;

Question 19
FI
An experiment was carried out to investigate the loss of water from three similar leaff shoots
N
placed in the same room. The leary shoots were treated as follow.
d
shoot Treatment
A Upper leafsurface covered with waterproof vaseline
B Lower leaf surface covered with waterproof vaseline
C Untreated

Amount ofwater lost/ g

Shoot A

Time/ h

(a) The graph above shows the water loss from Shoot A. Use the same axes above to draw and label
the graphs for water loss from Shoot B and Shoot C. [2 mJ

[b) It was observed that there was no significant difference in loss of water from Shoot A as
compared to Shoot C. Explain the observation. (2 m)

(c) A similar Shoot D that was untreated was left in another room. It was observed that the amount
of water lost was much higher than Shoots A, B or C. Give one possible reason for the
observation. [1 m)

d PhD EoLrcation I www.phd-education.com.sg

 ts
N When
-Ques!.an2oa hibiscus leaf was immersed in a beaker of hot water, more bubbles were observed on one

N of the leaf surfaces as shown in the diagram below.

Hot water

Bubbles

Would the upper or lower surface ofthe hibiscus leafhave more bubbles? Explain your answer
(2 ml

Question 21
The diagram below shows a stem with an outer ring removed. As a result, the only tubes carrying
food in this stem were removed.

A close-up view

Soil

,,,,1

Predict what will happen to Part Y and Part Z after one week. Explain why. [4 m]

Part Observation Reason

PLD tdu(ation ] www.pl-d-edrrar on.co'r.sg

 Theme: Systems
(n
-N
10 Human and Animal Systems F{

1. The diagrams below show our respiratory system and part ofour digestive system.
Respiratory system Part of digestive system

B
A

I
Which ofthe following statement(sJ is/are true for the part marked A in the respiratory system
and B in the digestive system?
A. Air passes through A but not through B.
B. Food passes through B but not through A.
C. Food and air passes through both A and B.
(11 A only
(2) B only
t3) C only
(4) A and B only

2. The diagram below shows a human skeletal system.

Which parts ofthe skeletal system have the same type ofioints?
(11 A and C only

{2) Aand Donly

t3) BandC only
(4) Band D only

d PhD f ducation I www.phd-education.corr.,g

--___--I
3. Which senses can warn a blind man of food that has turned bad?
H A.
N Sight

5 B.
C.
Taste
Smell
D. Hearing
E. Touch
(1) BandConly
tZ) AandBonly
t3) CandDonly
(41 AandDonly

4. Tommy is unwell. His waste is watery. Which part of his digestive system is not working well?
t1l Gullet
(2) Stomach
(31 Small intestine
t4l Large intestine

5. The diagram below shows a ribcage. Which vital organ[sJ ofthe body does the ribcage protect?

A. Heart
B. Lungs
C. Liver
D. Stomach

t1l B only
(2) A and B only
(31 A,BandConly
{4) A,B,CandD

P,1D !ducaaion, www-phd-3dtj.aai3n

6. The diagram below shows our digestive system.
LN
N
F{
A

C E

D F

l
Which one ofthe following correctly identifies the parts where digestion offood and absorption
oflarge amount of water take place?

Digestion of food Absorption of large amount of water

t1) A,B,C,D F

(2) A,D,E F

(31 D,E,F G

t4) A,C,D G

7. Which ofthe following parts ofthe body are able to move without the help ofthe skeleton?
A. Head
B. Eyelid
C. Tongue
D. Lower jaw
(1) AandBonly
(2) BandConly
(3) CandDonly
t4) AandDonly

d PhD Education I www. phd-education.com.sg

...T8.
The diagram below shows the skeletal structure of a dog.
F
N T S

CN

II R

When a dog breathes in air through its nose, the air is exchanged in an organ so that the dog
receives oxygen and gives out carbon dioxide. \y'y'hich part ofthe skeletal structure protects this
organ?

t1) R
(z) s
(31 T
(4) U

9. Four boys were involved in a competition. The table below shows the breathing rates ofthe
four children at the beginning and the end of the competition.

Breathing rate (per minuteJ

child
At the beginning At the end

lohn ZO 25

Alvin ZO 22

Leon 18 23

Mike 79 24

Which of the following statements are most likely true?

A. lohn used more energy than Alvin.
B. lohn and Leon used the same amount ofenergy.
C. Mike and Leon had the same increase in their breathing rate at the end ofthe race.
D. Breathing rates ofall the boys increased at the end ofthe race because their bodies
needed to remove the excess carbon dioxide produced.

t1l A and C only

(2) A and B only
t3) C and D only
(4) B and D only

PhD Education I www. phd-ed ucation.com.sg

Study the diagram below and answer Questions 10 and 11 I.-

N
N
F{
A

D
E

10. In which part of the digestive system are waste materials passed out ofthe body?
(1) B
(z) C

t3l E
(4) F

11. Which ofthe following indicates the parts which produce digestive juices?

t1l A,CandDonly
(2) B,EandFonly
(31 C,DandEonly
(4) C,EandFonly

12. Edwin accidentally swallowed some watermelon seeds while eating a piece of watermelon
What would happen to the seeds?

t1) The seeds would be digested.

(2) The seeds would remain in the stomach.
(3) The seeds would be passed out ofthe body.
(4) The seeds would rot inside the small intestine

13. Digestion offood begins in our and ends in our

t1) stomach, anus

{2) mouth, anus
t3) mouth, small in test ine
t4) gullet, large intestine

d PhD lducalion I www. phd-erir.:calaon.rom.sg

__T74.
Which of the following correctly states how respiration helps a living thing to stay alive?
ts (U
N Respiration uses food to release energy necessary for survival.

6 12)
(3)
Respiration
Respiration
produces carbon dioxide which is needed by plants to survive.
helps to digest the food necessary for a living thing to survive.
(4) Respiration produces oxygen that is necessary for the survival ofall living things.

15. Which ofthe following correctly shows the difference between inhaled air and exhaled air?

Inhaled air Exhaled air

t1l More dust Less dust

(z) More water vapour Less water vapour

t3l Higher temperature Lower temperature

(41 More carbon dioxide [,ess carbon dioxide

16. Solution A helps to kill all microorganisms in Set-ups X and Y. The diagram below shows an
experiment to find out about respiration carried out by germinating seeds. The same number of
germinating seeds and dead seeds were left in Set-ups X and Y respectively. All the seeds were
placed in Solution A during the experiment.

Thermometer

Germinating Stopper
seeds in
Solution A

lnsect Limewater

Set-up X
Thermometer

Stopper
Dead seeds in
Solution A

Insect Limewater

Set-up Y

Which of the following changes were most likely observed at the end of the experiment?
A. The insect lived longer in Set-up Y than in Set-up X.
B. The temperature was higher in Set-up X than in Set-up Y.
C. The limewater in Set-up X was less chalky than in Set-up Y.
D. More water droplets were formed in Set-up Y than in Set-up X.
(1) A and B only
(2) B and C only
(31 C and D only
t4l A,B,CandD
PID Education I wvrw.phd-e C;caalcn,com.sg
17. The diagram below represents the composition ofgases in inhaled air
C,l
z
N
Y
FI

xev
X: Oxygen
Y: Nitrogen
Z: Carbon dioxide, other gases and water vapour

Which of the following statement[s] is/are true after the inhaled air enters the human
respiratory system and exits as exhaled air?
A. Amount of X increases.
B. Amount ofY increases.
C. Amount of Z increases.
(11 A only
(2) C only
(31 A and B only
t4l B and C only

18. The diagrams show experiments which some pupils set up in the garden on a sunny day. The
jars were sealed so no air could enter or leave. In which set-up would the organisms most likely
die first?

t1l (2)

Legend

#
p
Snail

Fish

(3) /////////////////fr//ffi (4)

&*
#
Water plant

4$

m Sealed lid

d PhDIC-u;,ti l'r I a,,',* L':o LLrJLatlon.Com 58

 19. Some apparatus are set up to represent the respiratory system of the human body
ts
UJ
o
Stopper

Straw

Balloons

Bell jar

Rubber sheet

Which ofthe following will be observed when the apparatus is used to demonstrate air being
inhaled?
Movement of rubber sheet Balloons
(11 Downwards Expand
(2) Upwards Expand
(3) Downwards Contract

t4l Upwards Contract

20. The diagram below shows carbon dioxide being taken in or given out during some processes
Carbon dioxide
in the air A

I A
C B

& I

\ Death Dea th

I t
Bacteria acting on
D
dead organisms

A, B, C and D are fourdifferent processes. Which one ofthe following options in the table below
identifies the Processes A, B, C and D correctly?

A B C D

t1) Photosynthesis Respiration Burning Decomposition

(2) Respiration Photosynthesis Burning Decomposition
(3) Photosynthesis Burning Decomposition Respiration
(4) Decomposition Respiration Photosynthesis Burning

Fa:D i:dr..::on I www. phd-ed ucala3n..om.sg

21. Four friends put some organisms into three identical containers as shown below. They left the
r
set-ups in a sunny part ofa field from 9 a.m. to noon. r{
(n
Air-tight F{
glass jar
Plant Plant
Cockroach
Cockroach Moist soil

Set-up A Set-up B Set-up C

Wendy and her friends made the following statements about the amount of oxygen in the set-
ups.
Wendy: There was an equal amount ofoxygen at noon in all the set-ups.
Tim: Set-up C had the most amount of oxygen at the end of the experiment.
Ali: Set-up A had the least amount ofoxygen at the end ofthe experiment.
Mary: There was more oxygen in Set-up B than in C at the end ofthe experiment.
Which of them was correct?

i1 Mary only
(2 Tim and Ali
t3 Wendy and Tim
(4 Ali and Mary

22. The diagram below shows part ofthe human respiratory system

A ,{ C

'l
B

Based on the diagram above, which ofthe following statements are true?
A. Part A allows air to enter and leave the body system.
B. Part B is the main pipe that air enters and leaves.
C. Part C contains tiny air sacs surrounded by many tiny blood vessels.
D. Part B cleans the air by trapping impurities before the air enters the system
1l A and B only
2) A and C only
3l A,BandConly
4) A,BandDonly

d 'rij Lduca:i) r | ..,.,iv,.phd eo..r,rl L L,J.r.rB

 The diagram shows the human respiratory system
H
u)
-23.
N Rib cage

Diaphragm

Which of the following correctly shows the movements of the ribs and the diaphragm during
inhalation and exhalation?

Ribs Diaphragm
Inhalation Exhalation Inhalation Exhalation
t1) Down and outwards Up and inwards Relaxes Contracts
(2) Down and inwards Up and outwards Relaxes Contracts

t3l Up and outwards Down and inwards Contracts Relaxes

t4l Up and inwards Down and outwards Contracts Relaxes

24. A group ofpeople was trapped in a lifL The following graphs show the changes in the amount of
gases in the lift. Which one is most likely to be incorrect?

[1J Carbon dioxide Q) oxYgen

Time Time

t3l Nitrogen (4) water vapour

Time Time

PhD Ldu.aaion I www. phd-:d ucation.c.11.sg

25. The diagram below shows the exchange ofgases in our circulatory system.
]-
(n
(n
Oxygen Carbon dioxide F{

Oxygen Carbon dioxide

Which ofthe following parts ofthe body are represented by A, B and C respectively?

A B C

(1) Heart Lungs All parts ofthe body

(2) Heart All parts ofthe body Lungs
(3) All parts ofthe body Heart Lungs

t4) Lungs Heart All parts ofthe body

26. Which of the following diagrams shows how blood is circulated in our body?

t1)
Lungs Heart All parts ofthe body

(2)
Heart Lungs All parts ofthe body

(3)
Lungs Heart All parts ofthe body

t4)
Lungs Heart All parts ofthe body

d PhD Education I www. phd-education.com.sg

- The graph below shows the amount of oxygen in four blood samples taken at the same hme
-TZl
F from four different blood vessels in the body.
ul
5 Amount of oxygen

ABCD
The diagram below shows how blood is circulated in our body.

Lungs

Rest ofbody

Which blood sample (A, B, C or D) was most likely taken from P of the circulatory system
above?
(11 A
(2) B
(3) C
(4) D

PhD Education I www. phd-education.com.sg

 28. The diagram below shows a simple representation ofblood circulation in a human body. --
Arrows W, X, Y and Z represent the flow ofblood to different parts ofthe body. rn
tn
Lungs FI
z
Heart
x Y
Other parts ofthe body

Which one ofthe following graphs correctly represents the amount ofcarbon dioxide in W, X, Y
and Z?

(11 Amount of carbon dioxide (2) Amount of carbon dioxide

WXYZ WXYZ
(3) Amount ofcarbon dioxide (4) Amount of carbon dioxide

wxYz WXYZ

d' hD :ducation I www. phd-educaticn.1:om.sg

 9. The diagram below shows our circulatory system. X and Y represent organs. A, B, C and D
ts represent blood vessels.
-2ut
Or
C B

x
A D
All pafts ofthe body

Which one of the following about our circulatory system is correct?

Type of Blood in
Organ X Organ Y
A B C D
Rich in Rich in
(1) Rich in Rich in
Heart Lungs Carbon Carhon
oxygen oxygen
dioxide dioxide
Rich in Rich in
Rich in Rich in
(2) Heart Lungs Carbon Carbon
oxygen oxygen
dioxide dioxide
Rich in Rich in
Rich in Rich in
t3) Lungs Heart Carbon Carbon
oxygen oxygen
dioxide dioxide
Rich in Rich in
Rich in Rich in
t4) Lungs Heart Carbon Carbon
oxygen oxygen
dioxide dioxide

30. The diagram below shows an air sac lined by a blood vessel in the lungs ofa man. Blood is
flowing along the blood vessel from C to A.
Air flow

Blood flowing along a

blood vessel

C
B

Which one ofthe following correctly describes the oxygen levels at A, B and C?

A B C

t1) High High Low

(z) High Low High
(3) Low High Low
(4) Low Low High

plD Education j www. phd-ed:']caaion.com.sg

 I-
Ouestion 31
Solution X changes colour when the amount of carbon dioxide dissolved in it changes. This is
N
(n
shown in the table below.
F{
Colour ofSolution X Amount of dissolved carbon dioxide
Reddish orange Same amount of carbon dioxide as in the air
Yellow More carbon dioxide than in the air

Purple Less carbon dioxide than in the air

Three test tubes filled with water were set up. The diagrams below show what was put inside the
test tubes.
A B C

,il:'.

Water snails Water weed Water snails and water weed

Solution X was then poured into each test tube. The test tubes were left in the sunlight for 2 hours.
(a) What would be the colour of Solution X in Test tube A? [1 m)

(bJ Name the process taking place in the water snails which causes the colour change in part [a]
[1 ml

(c) What would be the colour of Solution X in Test tube B? [1 m)

(d) Name the process taking place in the water weed which causes the colour change in part [c).
(1 m)

(e) Assuming that the colour of Solution X in Test tube C did not change, explain why. (1 mJ

d PhD Education I www.phd ed ucation.com.sg

-_----_--^
uuesnon 5z
ll
[p The volume ofair breathed during three different activities, A, B and C, is shown on the graphs
below.
0O
Activity A Activity B Activitv C

Volume ofair Volume ofair Volume ofair

breathed in cm3 breathed in cm3 breathed in cm3

15 15 15

72 72 72 I lll t ail I l
I I 9
I [ t] t

6 6 6
I t
it I
I I I
3 3
I I
3 lI lIllI
I\ L

0 510 15 0 510 15 0 5 10 15
Time in seconds Time in seconds Time in seconds

[a) ln Activity B, how many breaths are taken in per minute? (1 mJ

(bJ Which activity, A, B or C, is likely to be that of someone who is resting? (1 mJ

[c] Explain why Activity C is different from Activities A and B? (2 m)

PhD Educatron I www. phd-edr,cation.com.sg

 r-
Question 33
C')
The diagram below shows part ofthe human digestive system. (n
F{
Stomach

Small intestine
Large intestine

Rectum
Anus

[a) At which part ofthe digestive system does digestion end? (1 m)

[b] Muscles line the walls of the gullet and stomach. What are the functions of these muscles?
[2 m]
Muscles in the gullet

Muscles in the stomach:

(c) Which organ in the digestive system has a similar function as the fruit blender? (1 mJ

[d) Describe how the circulatory system works together with the digestive system. [2 m)

?hD Education I www.3hd-education.com.sg

---------r
Question 34
F
so The chart below shows how food is digested in the different regions ofthe human body. The width
of each band fblack shaded area] indicates the amount of food present in that part of the digestive
tract.

Part of digestive tract

Mouth Stomach Resion X

(a) Which part of the body is Region X? (1 m)

[bJ Based on the above chart, write "Fully digested", "Partially digested" or "Not digested at all" in
each ofthe boxes to describe what happens to food in the mouth and stomach. (2 ml

Part ofdigestive tract "Fully digested", "Partially digested" or "Not digested at all"
Mouth
Stomach

[c) Besides digestion, what other process also occurs in Region X? [1 m)

Question 35
Nathan was engaged in the following activities

A game of rugby

A peaceful sleep

A leisurely walk home

(a) During which of the activities listed above, would he be most likely to have the
(i) slowest heart beat? (1 m)

[ii) fastest heart beat? [1 mJ

[bJ Explain your answer in part[a)(ii]. [3 m]

PhD Edu.atian I www.phd ed:l.aaion.com.sg

Question 36 --F,l
The diagram below shows part ofthe human digestive system
F{

B
D

[a) Identifu Parts A, B, C and D. [2 m)

Part A:
Part B:
Part C:

Part D:

[bJ What is the main function of Part B? (1 mJ

[c] Mohar had a section of Part A removed as there is a high possibility that he might have cancer.
Based on your understanding ofthe digestive system, will he still be able to digest food? Give a
reason for your answer. (2 m)

d DhD :c-calion I www.phd-ed..:catiJl.cor-i."8

----------^
uuesnon J /
ll
! Randell ate a hamburger for lunch. The graph below shows how the amount of undigested food in
],J tr" hamburger changed as it passed through his digestive system.
Amount of undigested food

Mouth Gullet Stomach Small Large Rectum

intestine intestine

[a] Based on the graph, at which part of the digestive system would the greatest amount of food be
digested? (1 mJ

[b] Complete the graph above to show the amount of undigested food at the large intestine and the
rectum. (2 mJ

Question 38
The diagram below shows the digestive system ofa human body.

B D

PhD ld!.:iion I www. phd-educat:on.com.s

[aJ ln which part ofthe human digestive system does digestion first occur? (1 m) --fn
sf
F{
(b) At which part, A, B, C or D, is digested food absorbed into the bloodstream? (1 m)

[cJ Why is it important that digested food is absorbed into the bloodstream? (1 mJ

Question 39
The diagrams below show two systems in the human body.

t\

System F System G

[aJ Give the name of each of the two systems shown. (1 m)

(i) System F:
(ii) System G:

[b] Why are blood vessels necessary? (1 m]

PhD tducation I www.phd education.com. sg

 ll-
! Th" Ptot"tttt involved in the human digestive system are shown in the flowchart below
-ouestion40
D Food enters

Grinding of food
into smaller pieces

Muscular
contractions to Release of
move food along Substance A

Mixing of food with Beginning of Last phase of Movement ofwaste for

Substance A absorption absorption storage in the rectum

,______-_t ,________r
Absorption of Absorption of
Substance B into Substance C with
bloodstream mineral salts

[aJ What are Substances B and C? [2 m)

B:

C:

[b) What is the function of Substance A? (1 m)

[c] Give a similarity between digestion in animals and photosynthesis in plants. [1 m)

PhD Education I www. phd-ed ucation.com.sg

d
 r
Question 41
rJ1
The human body is made up of different systems to carry out important functions of the body. The
sf
systems are represented as shown below. The arrows symbolise different substances moving
within the body.
r{
KEY
Rich in carbon dioxide

Rich in oxygen
: Digested food

All body parts

Oxygen and
digested food

Study the diagram above.

[a] What are Systems B and C? (2 m)

System B:
System C:

[bJ what is the function of System A? (1 mJ

0uestion 42
A diagrammatic representation ofthe circulatory system is shown below.

Lungs KEY
Rich in carbon dioxide

Rich in oxygen
Heart

Other parts of
the body

(aJ Using the key provided, draw lines with arrows to connect the heart, lungs and other parts of
the body. Your arrows must indicate the flow ofblood in the circulatory system. [2 mJ

[bJ What is the difference between the blood entering the lungs and the blood leaving the lungs?
(1 m)

(c] 'r{hy does our heart beat faster when we are exercising? (1 m)

a.ircation I www. phd-ed rc::i3n...::r.:g

d'^
D
___________-

Question 43
H
F
C')
The diagram below shows blood vessels M,
in the upper arm.
P and K and the direction ofblood flow in the muscles

Blood Flow Blood Flow

M K

(aJ Which organ does blood at K eventually return to? (1 m)

[b] What is the main difference between the blood flowing in M and K? (1 mJ

(c) Blood vessel P has thinner walls than blood vessel M. Explain why P has thinner walls. [1 mJ

PhD Education I wrvw. phd-ed ucation.com.sg

 Theme: Systems
l\
- sf
LL The Unit of Life F{

1. The table below shows the presence of cell parts in different samples obtained from plants and
animals.

Cell A B c D

Nucleus
Cell wall

Cytoplasm
Chloroplast
Cell membrane

Which cell[sJ is/are from plants?

(11 A only
(z) A and C only
t3l B and D only
(4) A,B,CandD

2. The diagram below shows a plant cell.

Cell wall

Vacuole

Nucleus

Chloroplasts

Which one of the following parts ofa plant is the above cell likely to be found?
(11 Flower
(2) Fruit
(3) Leaf
(4) Root

d PhD Education I www. phd-education.com.sg

..".."-""-3
Which one ofthe following represents the parts that are present in the potato leafcell but not
H
s
o
in the human cheek cell?
(1) Cell wall, nucleus and cell sap
(2) Cell wall, chloroplast and cell sap
(31 Chloroplast, cell membrane and nucleus
(41 Chloroplast, cell membrane and cell wall

4. The diagram below shows a plant cell as seen through a microscope.

ABC
Which part ofthe cell allows photosynthesis to take place?
(1) A
(2) B
(31 c
(41 D

5. Malcolm observed two cells under a microscope. He recorded the cell parts that are present in
each cell in the table below. A tick (r') indicates the presence ofthe cell part.

CelI parts Cell P Cetl Q

Cell wall

Cell membrane

Chloroplast
Cytoplasm
Nucleus

Which one of the following statements is correct?

(11 Cell Q could be a leafcell.
(2) Cell P could be a cheek cell.
t3l Both cells can carry out photosynthesis.
(4) Cell P is a plant cell while Cell Q is an animal cell.

PhD Education I www. phd-education.com.sg

6. The diagrams below show three different cells as seen through a microscope. They are not
r-
drawn to scale. Or
sr
F{

AB c

Which of the above cells is/are single-celled organisms?

t1l A only
(2) C only
(31 A and B only
t4l B and C only

7. The diagram shows a cell from the leaf of a plant.

A

Which part ofthe cell controls substances that move in and out ofthe cell?
(1) A
(2) B
(3) c
(4) D

8. A culture ofyeast and another culture ofbacteria were grown. At regular intervals, the area of
yeast and bacteria cells (in cmzJ was measured under the microscope and the results were
tabulated in the table below.

Time/ min 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

Area of yeast/ cm2 5 5 10 10 10 20 20

Area of bacteria/ cmz 5 10 20 40 80 160 320

What can be concluded?

A. Bacteria makes a copy ofitselfevery 10 minutes.
B. Yeast makes a copy ofitselfonce every 20 minutes.
C. Yeast takes a longer time to reproduce itselfthan bacteria.

t1l A and B only

(2) A and C only
t3l B and C only
(4) All of the above
phD Education I www.phd-education.com.sg
 The Able below provides some information on three types ofcells, X, Y and Z. A tick
ts (/J indicates the presence ofthe part ofthe cell.
-gUI
C) Parts ofCell Cell X Cell Y Cell Z

Cell wall

Nucleus

Chloroplast

Which ofthe cell[s) is/are most likely to be found in the root ofa plant?
(11 X only
(2) Z only
(3) X and Y only
(41 Y and Z only

10. Four cells, P, Q R and S, are classified according to the chart shown below

Cell

Has a cell wall Has no cell wall

Has chloroplast Has no chloroplast Has nucleus Has no nucleus

P a R S

Based on the chart, which ofthe following statements about Q R or S could be correct?
P,

(1) P could be a leafcell while R could be a root cell ofa plant.

(2) R could be an onion skin cell while S could be an animal nerve cell.
(3) Q could be a root cell of a plant while S could be a human red blood cell
(4) S could be a human red blood cell while P could be an onion skin cell.

PhD Education I www. phd-ed ucation.com.sg

 I-
Question 11
F{
The diagram of a plant cell is shown below rr)
o o o oo o
F.l
o

o
o o
o
o oooo o o

[a] Identiry the part ofthe plant cell which helps the plant to carry out photosynthesis and label it
'A' in the diagram above. (1 m)

[bJ It is said that this plant cell comes from an onion. Do you agree? Explain your answer. (1 m)

Question 12
Tom tried to observe Cell X under a microscope but he could not see the cell very clearly as most
parts of Cell X are colourless. He then put a drop of iodine onto Cell X and then washed off the
iodine. He observed the cell under the microscope again and found that one part in the cell has
been stained dark blue. Tom deduced that some iodine solution must have entered the cell.
(a) IsCell Xaplantcell oranimal cell? Explain youranswer. [1 m)

(b) Which part of the cell allowed the iodine solution to enter the cell? (1 mJ

Ouestion 13
Some pupils observed two groups of cells under a microscope. The diagram below shows what they
observed.

A B

Which group of cells, A or B, comes from a plant? Give a reason for your answer. (1 m)

d PhD Fducation I www.phd education.com.sg

 ^

II
[5 StudV tne aiagram below.
-Questi-on-14
N
A
B

Cell X D

(a) Which part of Cell X tells you that it is a plant cell? Why? (1 mJ

(b) Is Cell X able to make food? Give a reason for your answer. [1 m)

Question 15
Michael wanted to build a model that shows the function of a cell membrane. He filled a bag made
of a special material with water and starch. He placed the bag into a beaker filled with iodine
solution and left it there for 5 hours as shown below. He noticed at the end of 5 hours that the
mixture of starch and water which was originally white had become dark blue while the water
containing iodine solution remained the same.

Bag made of
special material
,i
Beaker filled with Mixture ofstarch
iodine solution and water

(a) Why did the mixture of starch and water become dark blue? [1 m)

(b) Why did the iodine solution remain the same? (1 m)

PhD Educatior I www.phd-education.com.sg

d
Ouestion 16
(n
The diagram below shows a plant cell.
- tn
F{
o

o
o

o
o
o

o
o

[aJ A scientist wanted to insert some genetic material that would enable the plant cell above to
make a new substance T. In the above diagram, label and name the part ofthe cell that he
should insert the genetic material. [1 mJ

[b] It was found that although the plant cell was able to produce the new substance T, the
substance could not get out of the cell. Name the part of the cell that could have stopped T from
getting out ofthe cell. (1 m)

Ouestion 17
Alice was looking at a single-celled organism, Chlamydomonas, through a microscope as shown
below.
Flagella

Vacuoles Cytoplasm

Red eyespot

Chloroplast
Nucleus
Cell wall

[a) State the function of cytoplasm in a Chlamydomonas. (1 m)

[b] Alice declared that the organism was an animal cell. Is she correct? Explain your answer clearly.
(2 mJ

D l-duLali,)1 | .,r,,r rr, phd eoLLaliol .o.r .:

___________r^
uuesuon lu
IJ
[5 IuaV used a microscope to examine some cells on a slide. The cells are shown in the diagram below.
Pr.ts ofthe cells are labelled P. Q and R.
$
a

P R

Based on what she saw,ludy made the following statements. Put a tick (/J in the appropriate
boxes to indicate whether the statements are 'True', 'False' or 'Not Possible to Tell'. [4 m)

Judy's statements True FaIse Not Possible to Tell

P gives support to the plant cell
(a)
and helps it to maintain its shape

Q ispartially permeable and

tbl controls the movement of
materials in and out ofthe cell
These plant cells are from the leaf
Ic) ofthe elodea.
R is thepart of the cell that
idl contains chlorophyll needed for
photosynthesis.

PhD ldLr.:t:o. I www.phd-eCL:cati.n.co m.sg

Question 19 --tn
During one ofthe Science lessons, Yoyo's teacher gave her a cell from a multicellular organism to
study under a microscope. She drew out the cell that she observed as shown in the diagram below.
]n
F{
She was unable to identiry the cell as she realised that her teacher had removed a part from the cell

^o o
o
o
o
o o

[a) Name the part ofthe cell that herteacherhad removed. (1 m]

(b) Other than the part that her teacher had removed, what other observation could allow Yoyo to
confirm the type oforganism that the cell was taken from? [1 m)

D Education I www.phd-education.com.sg
 ..

-_-----I Theme: Systems

ts
UI -.
O) 12 Electrical Systems
1. Study the circuit diagram below carefully.
A
I
B
I
C

..

"-----],1 ^..
There are four objects, A, B, C and D. Only one of the objects is an insulator of electricity, while
the others are conductors ofelectricity. When the switch is closed, only two bulbs light up.
Which one of the obiects is an insulator of electricity?

tl)
(2)
A
B
(31 c
t4l D
:
2. The diagram below shows five bulbs connected in a circuit.

S2

s3
s4 S1

Which ofthe switches, 51, 52, 53 and 54, should be closed for all the bulbs to light up?
(11 51 and S2 only
(2) 51 and 53 only
(3) 51, 52 and S4 only
(4) S2, 53 and 54 only

PhD Education I www.phd-education.com.sg

^
3. Keagan carried out an investigation to find out if an object allows electricity to pass through
r
when connected in an electrical circuit. Four objects, A, B, C and D, are made ofdifferent N
materials but are similar in size and thickness. Each object was connected in the circuit shown I,l
in the diagram below and the results are recorded in the table. F{
Batteries
Wire

Object

Bulb
Crocodile Clip

Obiect Does the bulb light up?

A Yes

B No

C Yes

D No

Which of the following shows the materials which Obiects A, B, C and D are likely made oP

A B C D

(1) Fabric Ceramic Plastic Carbon

t2) I ron Ceramic Copper Rubber

t3l Rubber Steel Glass Carbon

(4) Steel Iron Paper Fabric

4. Jacky set up the following circuit. R is a 5 cm iron rod. He closed the circuit and observed the
brightness ofthe bulb. He repeated the experiment using iron rods ofB cm, 10 cm and 15 cm.

Which one of the following is likely to be Jacky's aim of experiment?

(11 To find out ifthe presence ofthe switch affects the flow ofelectricity.
(2) To find out how the number ofbatteries affects the flow ofelectricity.
(3) To find out how the material of the rod affects the brightness of the bulb
(4) To find out how the length ofthe rod affects the brightness ofthe bulb.

d lha) adrcalion I www. phd-eC;calion.com.sg

""..""-..-5
Amanda constructed an electrical circuit as shown in the diagram below.
ts
lJl x S1

6 rlrl
Y
z

S2

S3

Some obiects were each placed at various points, W, X, Y and Z, in the circuit. These obiects
include a wooden toothpick, a bulb, a metal pin and a rubber band. Amanda closed some
switches and recorded her observations in the table below.

Switches closed Does the bulb light up?

51 and 53 No

52 and 53 Yes

Based on her observations, which one ofthe following correctly identifies the obiects placed at
points W, X, Y and Z?

w x Y 7.

(1) Rubber band Metal pin Bulb Wooden toothpick

(2) Metal pin Bulb Wooden toothpick Rubber band
(31 Wooden toothpick Bulb Ruhher hand Metal pin
(41 Wooden toothpick Rubber band Bulb Metal pin

6. Circuits A, B and C are made up of similar batteries and bulbs

P QR T

Circuit A Circuit B Circuit C

Which ofthe following shows the correct order ofbulbs arranged from the brightest to the least
bright?
(1) R,S,P
(2) S,R,Q
t3l P,S,R
t4) T,Q,P

PaD Education I www. pid-education.con.sg

7
r-
C')
rn
F{

Which one ofthe following circuit diagrams represents the circuit above?

(1) (2)

(3) (4)

lt

8. The following circuit is set up to find out if different types of conductors would affect the
loudness ofthe bell.

CondDctor

Bell

ln order to get the correct results, which variables should be kept constant?
A. Number of batteries
B. Type of bell
C. Type ofconductors
D. Number of switches
E. Voltage ofbulb

t1) A and C only

(z) B and D only
t3) only
A, B, D and E
(41 A,B,C,DandE

PhD Edu.31irn I www.phd-ed:..:cation.com.sg

 Amelia tested the switches offour circuits. She recorded one set ofthe results in the table
H below.
-9O)
o Switch A

OFF
Switch B

OFF
Number of bulbs lighted up
0
...

ON OFF 7

OFF ON 1

ON ON Z

Which one ofthese electrical circuits will produce the results recorded in the table above?
(1) (2)
A

A
B

(3) (4)

A
A

10. Study the diagram of an electric circuit shown below

Bulb X

If Bulb X fuses, how many bulbs will remain lighted?

(1) 7
(2) 2
(31 3
t4) 0

PhD Edu.aaion I www.phd-ed ucaaion.com.sg

d
11. An experiment was set up as shown in the diagram below. When the circuit was closed, it was
r
observed that the nichrome wire was red hot. ra
(o
F{
Nichrome wire

Iron bar

Liquid X

Which ofthe following statements are possible deductions that can be concluded from the
experiment?
A. Heat can pass through Liquid X.
B. Electricity can pass through Liquid X.
C. The greater the number ofbatteries in the circuit, the hotter the nichrome wire.
D. Electrical energy in the circuit is converted to heat enerry and light energy in the
nichrome wire.
(1) A and onlyC

{2) only
B and D
t3) B,CandDonly
t4) A,B,CandD

12. Study the circuit diagram below.

B1

tz
B2

Btz-zer
s1

B3

S3

Which of the following is correct?

Open Close Result

t1l S1 52, 53 Only 81 and 83 will light up

(z) S3 51, 52 Only 81 and 82 will light up

(3) S2 51, 53 Only 83 will light up

(4) S2, 53 S1 Only 82 will light up and buzzer will sound

d ''nD tdu, aliu'r | *ww.phd-eC-c.rl L, , Lom.>8

 Different materials, W, X, Y and Z, were used to set u p four circuits as shown in the diagram
H below
-13.
C')
N
Set-up A x Y Set-up B

Y Set-up C x Z Set-up D x

The four circuits were tested and the results are shown in the table below.

Does the bulb light up?

Set-up
Yes No

\{hat can be concluded from the experiment?

t1] Material Y is a non-conductor ofelectricity.

(Z) Materials W and Y are conductors ofelectricity.
(3) Materials X and Y are non-conductors ofelectricity.
(4) Materials X, Y and Z are conductors ofelectricity.

14. Study the circuit diagram shown below

Bell C D

Bell
B

Bell

Which ofthe switches must be closed in order to light up only the bulb but not ring any bell?

t1l AandD
(2) BandC
(31 AandC
(4) BandD

PhD Edu.aalon I www. piC-education.cor-:.sg

15. The diagram below shows two wires, X and Z, connected to an unknown object placed in Box Y.
--(n
x z l.O
F{
Wire X was joined to A and Wire Z to B as shown in Circuit 1. The bulb lit up. However, when
Wire Z was joined to A and Wire X to B as shown in Circuit 2, the bulb did not light up.
..t,,

Circuit 1 Circuit 2

x Z x
Y Y
A B A B

Ifthe bulb used was similar and the batteries were ofequal voltage, which ofthe following
objects could be in the box?

t1) (2)

Pencil lead Battery

t3l (4)

Aluminium foil Glass mirror

16. The electric circuit shown in the diagram below has three bulbs, P, Q and R.

P a

If Bulb Q fuses, which of the following will still happen?

A. Bulb P will light up.
B. Bulb R will light up.
C. Bulb Q will light up.
D. None of the bulbs will light up.
(1) B only
(2) D only
(3) AandBonly
t4) A, B and C only

d thD adrcati.r I www. phC-ed:.:catio.r.com.sg

 which one of the following set-ups are the batteries connected in parallel while the bulbs are
H connected in series?
gr
-17.
5 t1l (2)

(31 t4l

18. Which two circuits shown below can be used to show how the arrangement ofbatteries affect
the brightness ofthe bulb?

ABCD
l,l'

(1) AandC
t2) BandC
t3l AandD
(4) BandD

19. foyce wanted to find out if the arrangement of bulbs would affect the brightness of the bulbs
Which set-ups should she use to ensure a fair test?

Set-up A Set-up B Set-up C Set-up D

(11 A and B only

(2) C and D only
(3) A,BandConly
(41 B,CandDonly

PhD Education I www. phd-education.com-sg

20. The electric circuits shown below were set up to test a hypothesis.
r-
]n
l.O
F{

Which of the following could be the hypothesis?

(1) The more the number of bulbs in a circuit, the dimmer the light from each bulb will be
{2) The brightness ofthe bulbs is affected by the way they are arranged in an electric
circuiL
(3) The lesser the number of dry cells in a circuit, the dimmer the light from each bulb.
(4) The brightness ofthe bulbs is affected by the way the dry cells are arranged in an
electric circuit.

21. The diagram below shows four circuits, D, E, F and G

Ir

Circuit D Circuit E Circuit F Circuit G

If the type ofbattery and bulb used is the same for each circuit, which circuit will have the
dimmest bulb(sJ?
(11 Circuit D
(2) Circuit E
(3) Circuit F
(4) Circuit G

d PhD Iducation I www.phd-education.com.sg

- the four circuit diagrams below. All the bulbs are similar and the batteries are of equal
-TZZ.Study
ts voltase.
ol
or Bulb W

Bulb X

Bulb Y

Bulb Z

Which ofthe following statements describes the results most accurately?

(1) Bulb Y is the brightest.
(2) Bulb Z will not light up.
(3) Only Bulbs Y and Z will light up.
(41 Bulbs Wand Xare ofequal brightness.

23. Study the two set-ups shown in the diagram below.

I I I

Set-up X Set-up Y

Which of the following statements are false?

A. The bulbs in Set-up X are brighter than the bulbs in Set-up Y.
B. Both the bulbs and batteries in Set-up Y are arranged in series.
C. The batteries in Set-up Y will last longer than the batteries in Set-up X.
D. lf one of the bulbs in Set-up X is fused, the other bulb will not be able to light up.
(11 AandBonly
(2) A and C only
(3) BandDonly
(4) B, C and D only

PhD Education I www.phd-education.com.sg

24. Maggie wanted to find out how the wires behind the circuit card shown below were connected. l
She pined the two ends ofa circuit tester to the different points ofthe card each time and l:,
recorded the results in a table. fO
F{
oA
B D
a .C a

.E

Points joined to the circuit tester Did the bulb tight up?

AandB No

AandE Yes

BandD No

CandE Yes

Which ofthe following shows the correct arrangement ofthe wires behind the circuit card?

(11 (2)
.A A

B D B D
C a C

\ E E

(3) (4)
A A
B D B D
C o a C

E E

D Fducation lwww.phd cc-"ation.con ,d

--__----^
uuesuon z5
tl
hr The circuit as shown in the diagram below is used to test if Obiects A, B, C, D and E are made of
f,.1 conductors of electricity. The different objects are connected to the circuit at testing positions P, Q
and R, and the findings are recorded in the table below.
-
Obiects placed at Does the bulb light up?
P o R BuIb 1 Bulb 2 Bulb 3
A B C

E D A

C D E

E A B

B C D

Bulb 1

Bulb

#rl
2
a
R
Bulb 3

(aJ One ofthe testing positions chosen is unsuitable in determining ifall the three objects tested at
the same time are conductors of electricity.
(i) Which testing position, P, Q or R, is unsuitable? [1" m)

(ii) In the circuit diagram above, mark an 'X' on the circuit to indicate where the new testing
position should be placed so that it will be suitable to determine ifall the three objects
tested at the same time are conductors of electricity. [1 m)

(b) Which ofthe material(s) is/are non-conductors ofelectricity? [1 mJ

PlD Educatior I www.phd-ed:caaion.co.r.sg

 Question 26 --(r)
Study the circuit diagram below.
(o
S1 S2 s3 F{

A C F

B D E G

(a) If all the switches are closed and Bulb E is fused, how many bulbs will light up? [1 mJ

[b] If all the switches are open, which are the bulbs that will light up? [1 mJ

(c) Which bulb(sl do[esJ Switch 3 control? (1 m]

(dJ Give two reasons why a parallel arrangement ofbulbs is better than a series arrangement.
[2 m)

Question 27
The diagram below shows a battery, two bulbs and two pieces of wires. Using not more than four
wires, connect the battery to the bulbs such that even if one bulb blows, the other bulb will still
light up. (2 ml

oo
gg

:dL:cation I www.phd-education.com.sg

drtt;
 F A and B show two circuits that are used to compare the electrical properties of two
{ Circuits
-QuesEon2S
o different materials X and Y. Identical batteries and bulbs are used in both circuits.

Circuit A Circuit B

Bulb 1 Bulb 2

Observations were made on the brightness ofthe bulbs and recorded in the table below

Bulb Brightness ofthe bulb

7 Bright
z No light

[aJ Based on the table, what electrical property do Materials X and Y have? [2 m)
[iJ Material X:
(iiJ Material Y:

[bJ Describe how Material Y can be useful to us when we use electricity. (1 m]

(c) In the diagram below, draw wires to show how Circuit A is connected. [2 m)

Bulb 1

PhD Educa: or I vvww.pr.-edJcalion.com ;d

 Question 29
r{
[aJ Study the four circuits A, B, C and D below
l\
F{

Circuit A Circuit B

Circuit C

Similar bulbs and batteries were used. When the circuits were connected, each ofthe bulb in
the circuit lit up. Arrange the circuits, A, B, C and D, in ascending order (from the dimmest to the
brightest) ofthe brightness of the bulbs. [2 mJ

(bJ The diagram below shows four bulbs, K, L, M and N, connected to two batteries.

M
I

N
I
ldenti$z the remaining bulbs which will stay lit when one other bulb blows. [Z m]

Bulb which blows Bulb[s) which remain lit

K

I,

D I-o-catio r I r{^',!.plld eo-cdl.run.com.sg

du^
 Question 30
H A circuit is set up using the same type ofbatteries and bulbs.
{
N

(aJ Fill in each blank with a correct word. [1 mJ

WhenanelectriccurrentflowSthroughthe-inabulb,someoftheelectrical
energy is changed into energy, which is useful.

(bJ It is decided to make some changes to the circuit to produce a brighter light in each bulb. Put a
tick beside each statement that describes what should be done. (3 m)

Remove one or two bulbs.

Lengthen the wire.

Reconnect the bulbs in a parallel arrangement.

Reconnect the batteries in a parallel arrangement.

Add more batteries

(cl What will happen if one of the bulbs fuses? (1 mJ

PID [ducaaion t www.phd-education..om.sg

d
Question 31
--(t1
A student wants to find out the least number ofbatteries that would cause the bulb in a circuit to
fuse. He is given five new batteries ofthe same type, some wires and a bulb. He wants to carry out N
the investigation in the steps listed below. FI
Method
Step 1 Connect five batteries to the circuit.
Step 2 Remove one battery from the circuit.

Step 3 Observe whether the bulb Iights up

Step 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until the bulb fuses.

[a] His teacher said that his method is incorrect. Explain why. (1 m)

(bJ How coutd you improve on his method? Write down the steps for your investigation in the table
below. The number ofsteps is not fixed. [3 mJ

Your method
Step 1

Question 32
The diagram below shows the symbols in a circuit diagram representing three batteries and a bulb.

[aJ In the diagram above, draw lines representing wires to construct a closed circuit so that the
bulb will give out the brightest light. [2 m]
[b) When circuit above, the bulb shone brightly for a short while
a 4th battery was added into the
and then blacked out. Explain what had happened. (1 m)

d ?hD adrca:ic.r I www.pl.rd-ed;calio.'l.ran':r.:g

P An experiment is set up to show that a coil of nichrome wire can heat up a beaker ofwater. All of
{
5 the following materials are used.

ffinmnm''
Switch Dry cells Nichrome wire

Beaker ofwater A bunch of insulated wires

(Draw as many insulated wires as you need)

(al In the space below, draw the electric circuit used to conduct the experiment. Label your
diagram. [5 m)

[bJ How would we know if this circuit works? (1 mJ

PhD Education I www. phd-education.corn.sg

 r-
Question 34
tn
A circuit card is shown in the diagram below
l\
A F{
F B
Buzzer

E C

Circuit Card Circuit Tester

A circuit tester is used to test the card and the results are tabulated as shown in the table below

Testing points Buzzer sounded? Testing points Buzzer sounded?

AandB Yes B and F No

AandC Yes CandD No

AandD No CandE Yes

AandE Yes CandF No

AandF No DandE No

BandC Yes DandF No

BandD No EandF No

BandE Yes

Assume that the other side ofthe circuit card is connected using wires. Indicate using only three
straight lines to show how the circuit card is connected below. (3 m)
A

F B

E C

d PhD Education I www. phd-education.com.sg

 Question 35
--P
Harry set up an electrical circuit as shown in the diagram below' The three obiects, A, B and C, were
{ made of different materials. He noticed that when he closed two switches at the same time, only
O) some bulbs were lighted up.
52 81
*---l r
I

B2 s3

S1
B3

The table below shows the combination of switches that were closed and the bulbs that were
lighted up respectively.

Switches closed Bulbs lighted up

s1, s2 87, 84

52, 53 81,82

(aJ Which two ofthe three obiects, A, B and C, are conductors of electricity? (1 mJ

(b] Harry wanted to place a buzzer in the circuit so that when he closes Switches 52 and 53, the
buzzer will ring. ln the diagram above, indicate with an 'X' to show where Harry should place
the buzzer. [1 mJ

PhD Educatron I www. phd-ed ucation.com.sg

Question 36 r-
N
In the circuit below, all bulbs, 81, 82, 83 and 84, are lit.
B1
l\
F{

B2 83

84
(a) What is the minimum number of bulbs that would remain lit when one of the bulbs in the
circuit is fused? Give a reason for your answer. (1 m)

[b) What is the maximum number of bulbs that would remain lit when one of the bulbs in the
circuit is fused? Give a reason for your answer. [1 mJ

PhD :d.;catia.. I www.phd-education.com.sg

---__-_-r
Theme: Interactions
ts
{
6 13 Magnets and Magnetic Forces
1. \,Vhich of the following obiects are made from magnetic materials?
A. Aluminium foil
B. Copper wire
C. Iron nail
D. Steel paper clip

t1) AandBonly
(2) CandDonly
(3) A, B and D only
t4) A, C and D only

2. The classification chart below shows the properties of four different materials

Materials

E F G H

- Green - Blue - Black - Brown

- Sinks in water water
- Sinks in - Sinks in water - Sinks in water
- Made of iron - Made ofsteel - Made of aluminum - Made ofcopper

Choose the two materials that can be separated from each other by using a magnet.
A. Materials E and F
B. Materials E and G
C. Materials F and H
D. Materials G and H
(11 A and B only
{2) A and C only
t3) B and C only
(41 B and D only

3. Mr. Muller wasted a lot of time removing the iron filings that were stuck to the bar magnets at
the end of his lesson. What do you think he should do to prevent the iron filings from getting
stuck directly to the bar magnets?

t1) Wet the magnets.

(2) Smear a layer ofoil on each magnet.
(31 Wrap the magnets with aluminium foil.
(41 Sprinkle the iron filings some distance away from the magnets.

PhD Edr.alion I www. phd-:dlca:ion.com.sg

4. The diagram below shows three magnets.
C')
h
F{

Which of the following statements about the poles ofthe magnets is/are false?
A. T and Ware like poles.
B. X will repel Q and be attracted to P.
C. W will repel P and be attracted to T.
(1) A only
(2) B only
(3) AandConly
(4) BandConly

5. An experiment was conducted with different magnets.

Magnet

Pins

The results ofthe experiment are recorded in the table below.

Number of pins attracted

Magnet
1.t Attempt 2nd Attempt 3rd Attempt
A 4 3 4
B 3 3 3

C 2 1 3

D 5 4 4

Which is the strongest magnet?

(1) A
{2) B
(31 C
(4) D

rcat;a.r I www.phd-education.com.sg
---------r
6 Magnets must be stored properly to retain their magnetic strength. An experiment is conducted
H
o
o
to find out the best way to store magnets. Four similar magnets of equal strength, A, B, C and D,
were stored with other magnets of similar strength in four different ways (W, X, Y and Z) as
shown in the diagram below.

N MagnetA S N Magnet B S

N S N s
), Metal keeper
w x

N Magnetc S N MagnetD S

S N S N
), Metal keeper
Y Z

After a weeh the four magnets, A, B, C and D were suspended to determine their strengths. The
number ofpins attracted to the magnets from the plastic tray was observed as shown in the
diagram below.

10 cm 10 cm
15 cm 15 cm

Pins

Plastic tray

Based on the observations made, which is the best way to store magnets?

tl)
(z)
w
x
t3l Y
t4l z

PhD Education I www.phd-education.com.sg

7 An experiment was set up to find out the magnetic strength of four magnets. The magnets were -lFl
initially placed at equal distances away from some steel paper clips. Eath magnet wai
subsequintly moved slowly towards the paper clips and the greatest distanc;s between the S
paper clips and each of the magnets at the instance when the magnets were first able to attract F{
the paper clips, were measured. The diagrams below show the start and the end ofthe
experiment.
At the beginning ofthe experiment
(:(:(: Magnet P

Magnet Q

(:(:(: Magnet R

Magnet S

At the end ofthe experiment

Magnet P

Magnet Q

Magnet R

Magnet S

Which ofthe following shows the correct sequence of magnetic strength ofthe four magnets
from the weakest to the strongest?
(1] P, Q, R, S
(Z) Q, S, R, P
(31 R, s, P, Q
(4) s,R,OP

B. A plastic sheet was placed between two nails and a magnet as shown in the diagram below. The
nails were attracted to the magnet. Subsequently, more and more similar plastic sheets were
placed between them until the nails could no longer be attracted by the magnet.

Magnet

Plastic sheet

Nail

What is the aim of the experiment?

t1l To find out ifplastic is magnetic.
(2) To find out ifthe nails are magnetic.
(3] To find out the strength ofthe magnet.
(4) To find out the parts ofthe magnet that has the strongest pull

d ?hD adxcation I www. phd-edr.rcalicn..om.:g

 with one end ofthe bar, P,
A metal bar PQ is hung by a thin thread. It always comes to rest
H
-gs
pointing North as shown in the diagram below. Another bar XY made of the same metal as PQ
settles in no definite direction.
N P

N x

a
What happens ifthe two bars are brought close to each other?
(1) End P attracts end X but repels end Y.
(2) End P repels end X but attracts end Y.
(31 End P neither attracts nor repels end X
t4) Both ends, P and Q, attract end X.

10. There are four similar objects, E, F, G and H, which are made of different materials. The table
below shows the materials that the objects are made of.

Obi ects E F G H

Material lron Steel Aluminium Copper

Two of the obiects were placed together in the combinations shown below. Attempts were
made to separate them from each other by using a magnet.

A. Obiects E and F
B. Obiects F and G
C. Objects F and H
D. Obiects G and H
Which of these attempts were successful?

t1) A and B
(2) Aand C
(3) B and C
{4) B and D

11. A bar magnet was broken into three pieces, A, B and C as shown in the diagram below

Which ofthe following is not possible when two broken pieces ofthe magnet are brought
together?

(11 (2) t3l t4l

PhD Education I www.phd-eCL;caaion.com.sg

12. Four materials, A, B, C and D were tested with a magnet. The materials were tested by placing --
the magnet at both ends ofthe material. The observations were recorded in the table below. tr1
¤
Material Left End Right End F{
A Attracted Attracted
B Not attracted Not attracted

C Repelled Attracted
D Attracted Repelled

Which of the following classification charts reflects the result?

(11 Materials t2) Metals

Non-magnetic Magnetic Non-magnetic Magnetic

B A,C,D B A,C,D

Metal Non-Metal Magnet Not magnet

C,D A C A,D

(31 Materials (4) Materials

Non-metal Metal Non-magnetic Magnetic

B A,C,D B AC,D

Magnetic Non-magnetic Magnet Not magnet

C,D A C,D A

13. The following three set-ups show different ring magnets, A, B, C and D, whose like poles are
facing each other. All the magnets have the same mass.

A A
C

B D D

Which one of the following statements is most likely to be correct?

t1) Magnet A is stronger than Magnet B.

(2) Magnet D is stronger than Magnet C.
t3) Magnet A is stronger than Magnet C.
(4) Not possible to tell which magnet is the strongest.

D lc*calir;n I www. phd-education.com.sg

 4. The diagram below shows four bar magnets that are attracted to each other
ts
-1@ A B

5 H C

G D

F E

Ifthree ofthe magnets are selected at random, which one of the following arrangements below
is a possible arrangement tlat will result in the magnets attracting each other?

t1) F E
(2) H G C D
C E

D B A F

(3) B A
(4)
G H

D C H A B E F G

15. The iron rods in each ofthe set-ups are ofthe same size. In which set-up will the iron rod
attract the most number of iron pins?

t1l t2)

Set-up A Set-up B

t3) (4)

Set-up C Set-up D

,l,l ,l,l

PhD Education I www.phd-education.corn

'--d
Question 16 --ln
An experiment is conducted to find out how the strength ofa magnet would be affected after being
hit by an iron hammer. The number of times the magnet was hammered is recorded and the
s
F{
distance the magnet must be placed from a paper clip in order to attract it was measured.

Distance N

Magnet Paper clip

The graph below shows the results of the experiment.

Distance N/ cm

9
I
7

4
3

0 No. of times hammered

5 10 15 20

[a] Read the statements in the following table and decide whether they are true, false or not
(/)
possible to tell. Put a tick in the correct column against each statement. [2 mJ

Statement True False Not possible to tell

After 25 times of hammering, the magnet

could no longer attract a paper clip.

Before being hammered, the magnet could

attract a paper clip from a distance of8 cm.

After 15 times of hammering, the magnet

could not attract a paper clip from a
distance of 1 cm.

After 10 times of hammering, the magnet

could aftract only 7 paper clips.

(bJ Name two common uses of magnet. (2 mJ

Education I www.phd-eC::c:llion.com.sg
--__---r^
uuesuon I /
tt
three bars, X, Y andZ, are suspended as shown in the diagram below. Observations were made on
i6 how the three bars interacted with each other.
6

Based on the observations, which ofthe following bars, X, Y, Z can be confirmed to be magnets?
Explain your answer. (1 mJ

Question 18
Diagram 1 shows a ring magnet being attached to a spring and it hangs freely. A different
observation was made when a bar magnet was placed under the ring magnet in Diagram 2.

Spring
Spring

Ring magnet B
A Bar magnet

Diagram 1 Diagram 2

ldentiry the forces acting at positions A and B. [2 m)

(a) is present at position A.
(bl is present at position B.

Question 19
Complete the following passage using an appropriate word for each blank. (2 mJ
A magnet is strongest at its and weakest in the middle. To turn a magnetic

material into a magnet one can use stroking, induction or electricity. A magnet loses its magnetism
when it is A stronger magnet will take a time to lose
its magnetism than a weaker one. A magnet exerts a that cannot be seen but
it can be felt.

PhD Edu.a.li{rn I www.phd-educaaian..or..sq

 r-
Question 20
An experiment was set up as shown in the diagram below.
F
¤
F{

Steel
Obiect A

(a) When the circuit above is switched on, what property of Obiect A can be tested? (1 m)

[b) Describe another way of testing the same property of Obiect A instead of using the above
circuit. (1 m)

Ouestion 21
The diagram below shows four bar magnets attracted together.

object M

(aJ Name the pole which is marked X in the diagram. (1 mJ

[b) Obiect M was brought near to the pole marked X and it was attracted to the magnet. From the
above observation, can we conclude that Obiect M is another magnet? Explain your answer.
(2 m)

ohD :o-cation I www.phd-educali11. orr. '8

--_--__-r^
uuesnon zz
ts
s6 \Mhen four metal bars, A, B,C and D, were hung from a piece ofrod, they moved in different
directions as shown in the diagram below.

II Rod

A B C D

(a) If two of the metal bars are magnets, which two metal bars, A, B, C, D, are most likely to be
magnets? (1 m]

[bJ Cive a reason for your answer in part (aJ. [1 m)

Question 23
Some pupils were given the following apparatus to make two electromagnets

6 batteries 2 steel nails 2 pieces of wire

They wanted to investigate if the number ofbatteries affects the strength ofthe electromagnets.
(aJ Draw a diagram in each box to show the two set-ups needed for the investigation. [2 m)

Set-up A Set-up B

[b) How would they test the strength of the magnets? [2 mJ

(c) What do you think is the conclusion? Explain your answer. (2 mJ

PhD Edueaalon { www.phd-educaaicn..onT .sg

Question 24 --
A dishonest hawker wanted to cheat his customers by making them pay more for their goods. He
o)
placed Object X iust below the weighing scale and covered it with a piece of cloth.
00
F{
Grams

Spring balance

EI

q3 Steel plate
Cloth
Obiect X

[a) What is Obiect X? (1 m]

(bJ Explain how Obiect X will increase the reading ofthe scale. [2 mJ

Question 25
An investigation is carried out using the same batteries, iron rods and paper clips. The results ofthe
test are shown below.

Iron rod
Copper wire
Battery
s
= Paper clip

Set-up A Set-up B Set-up C

Explain why the number of paper clips attracted by the iron rod in each set-up was different. (1 mJ

PhD Ed-calio,r I www.phd-education.com.sg

 e n 6
H
(o The set-up below consists of two ring magnets and a plastic ring.
o Ring A

Ring B
Ring C

Based on the above experiment, state whether the following statements are 'True', 'False' or 'Not
possible to tell'by putting a tick [/)
in the correct boxes. [2 m)

Statement True False Not possible to tell

Rings A and B are magnets

Ring C is a plastic ring.

Question 27
Study the diagram below carefully

+ + +

Switch
lron striker

Bell
Steel rod
Metal support

Swivels at this point

In the above set-up, when the switch is closed, electricity will pass through the circuit and the steel
rod will be magnetised. The striker will then be pulled back towards the steel rod, causing it to
break its contact with the bell. When this happens, the circuit is opened and the striker will move
back and hit the bell.

[a) State the energy conversion that takes place only when the circuit is closed. (1 m)

Batteries Circuit Iron striker

(b) Explain why the iron striker cannot be made ofcopper. (1 m)

[c) What would happen if the steel rodwas magnetised permanently? (1 m]

PhD Education www. ph d-ed ucation. com.sg

d
 r
Question 28
F{
The diagram below shows the greatest distance at which the magnets will attract Paper clips A and
B. Paper clip A is twice as heavy as Paper clip B.
Or
!.{
A 5cm Magnet W

A 9cm Magnet X

B 5cm Magnet Y

B r-) 9cm Magnet Z

Explain why Magnet X is considered the strongest among all the four magnets. (2 m)

-
Question 29
The table gives some properties offour substances, P, q R and S.

P a R S
Property
Colour Green Green Yellow Yellow
Can it dissolve in water? Yes No Yes No

Is it a magnetic material? No No No Yes

Some ofthe substances were mixed in some beakers ofwater as shown in the diagram below.

PandS PandR QandR

Beaker 1 Beaker 2 Beaker 3

(a) ln which ofthe beakers would the substances be most difficult to separate? Explain your
answer. (2 mJ

d PhD Education I www. phd-education.com.sg

--[b)
The four substances were then mixed in a dry tray.
F"
(o P,QRandS
]\,

Which one ofthe four substances would be the easiest to separate ftom the others? Suggest a
method to separate iL (1 ml

PhD Education I www.phd-education.com.sg

 Theme: Interactions
(n
- or
L4 Forces F{

1. Kenny tested the strength of four different strings by hanging weights on them gradually until
the strings break. The results are recorded in the table below.

String Mass of weights needed to break the string

E 820 g
F 290 g

G 550 g
H 760 g

Which is the strongest string?

(1) E
(2) F
(31 G
(4) H

2. The classification chart below shows the different ways of reducing friction.

Ways to reduce friction

A B

Apply lubricants on moving parts of machines Fix rollers on objects

Which ofthe objects in the table below use the above ways to reduce friction?

A B

(1) Skateboard Track shoes

(2) Sewing machine Trolley

t3) Cars Electric drill

(41 Telephone Spring balance

d PhD Fducalion I www. pnd-ed,cation.com. sg

-.-...""-3
The diagram below shows an electric baby cradle. When a baby is placed in the cradle, the
F
(o electric motor works to cause the elastic spring to stretch and compress such that the cradle
moves up and down to soothe the baby to sleep.
5 Ceiling
Electric motor

Elastic spring

Cradle

Which ofthe following graphs shows the gravitational force acting on the baby while the cradle
moves up and down?

t1) (2)
Gravitational force Gravitational force

Time Time

t3) (4)
Gravitational force Gravitational force

Time Time

4. Which of the following object(sJ do(es) not have any gravitational force acting on it?
A. A bird flying in the sky
B. A man lying on the floor
C. A balloon rising into the air

(11 B only
(2) A and C only
t3) A and B only
t4l None ofthe above

PhD Iducation I www. phd-educaaion.com.sg

 5. Lilian conducted an experiment with a suspended spring. She added weights of different mass --u1
onto the spring. For every weight hung, she measured the length ofthe spring and plotted a
graph between the length ofspring and the amount of mass suspended. Which one ofthe Or
following is likely to be the correct graph? F{
(1) (2)
Length ofspring Length ofspring

Mass of weights Mass of weights

\.,
(31 (4)
Length ofspring Length ofspring

Mass of weights Mass of weights

6. Use the flow chart below to identit/ the forces X,Y andZ

Force

Yes Yes
Can it act from a distance? ls it always a pull? x

No No

What could the forces X, Y and Z be?

x Y z
(11 Elastic spring force Magnetic force Weight

t2) Friction Water resistance Elastic spring force

t3l Magnetic force Air resistance WeiBht

t4l G ravity Magnetic force Elastic spring force

d PhD EdLcation I www.phd education.com.sg

 An experiment was conducted to find out how the force applied to pull a toy car up a ramp
ts varied with the angle ofthe ramp as shown in the diagram below. The angle ofthe ramp was
-7ro varied by changing the number ofwooden blocks.
O!
Spring balance
Toy car Wooden block

Angle

Which ofthe following graphs shows the correct result?

t1) Force applied (2) Force applied

Angle Angle

t3) Force applied (4) Force applied

Angle Angle

8. Which one of the following actions is not an example of a pushing force?

(11 Typing
t2l Bowling
(31 Kicking a ball
t4) Raising a flag

9. A bottle is rolling in the direction C. To make it move faster in the same direction, a force has to
be applied from _.
A

B <-D

(1) A
(2) B
(31 c
t4l D
PhD Education I www.phd-educaaion.com.sg

d
10. Fahana conducted three investigations using selected equipment from the table shown below
r-
l\
Plastic bottles Notebook and pen Wooden blocks Or
with water Wooden board
FI
Jug Tape measure

Which investigation cannot be carried out?

(11 Does the type ofbottle affect how far it will roll?
(2) Does the amount ofwater in the bottle affect how far it will roll?
(31 Does the steepness ofthe ramp affect how far the bottle will roll?
(4) Does the wooden board break when supporting bottles ofwater?

11. What is the direction ofthe frictional force acting on the box?

Push

A B

t1) A
(2) B
(31 C
(4) D

12. An obiect is dropped from the same height, each time with a different position onto a sand pit.
In which position viewed from the side, will the obiect make the deepest depression in the
sand?

t1) (2) (31 (41

Drop Drop Drop Drop

d PhD Education I www. phd-education.com.sg

.".-".".."-13.Thedi
agram below shows the length ofthe same spring suspending different loads.
H
(o
6 10 cm
L
16 cm
20g ?'r 18 cm

3o g

M
6og

Which one ofthe following sets ofvalues for M and L is correct?

MG) L (cm)

t1l 40 12

(2) 40 t4
(3) 50 12

(4) 50 74

14. Which of the following forces can exert both a push or a pull on other obiects at a distance?
A. Magnetic force
B. Frictional force
C. Gravitational force

tll A only
(2) A and B only
(3) B and C only
(4) A,BandC

15. Two identical balls, X and Y, are moving in the same direction but at different speeds on the
same surface as shown in the diagram below.

5 m/s 2 m/s

Which of the following will happen after Ball X collides with Ball Y?
A. Ball X and Ball Y will move in the same direction.
B. Ball X and Ball Y will move in opposite directions.
C. Ball X will slow down and Ball Y will move faster.
D. Ball X and Ball Y will both slow down and move at the same speed

t1) A and C only

(2) B and C only
(3) A and D only
(4) B and D only
PhD Education I www.phd-education.com.sg

'd
 I-
16. Which one of the following forces helps to pick up a small pebble with chopsticks as shown
below? C'T
C')
F{

(11 Friction
(2) Gravity
t3l Magnetic force
(4) Elastic spring force

17. Keith attached a strong magnet to a spring and placed it at the bottom of a ramp as shown in
the diagram below. A copper bar was placed at the top ofthe ramp and released. He observed
that the bar moved towards the magnet.

Copper bar

Magnet

Spring

Based on the information above, what were the forces acting on the copper bar as it moved
along the ramp?
A. Magnetic force
B. Frictional force
C. Cravitational force
D. Elastic spring force

(1) A and C only

(2) B and C only
(3) A,BandConty
(4) A,CandDonly

d PhD Education I www. phd-education.com. sg

 what of the follo wing statements about forces are correct?
N
o
-18.
o
A
B
A force can be felt.
A force cannot be seen.
C A force always causes things to move.
D Only some forces can act at a distance.

(11 AandBonly
(2) CandDonly
(3) A, B and C only
(4) A, B and D only

19. Which of the following forces are able to act at a distance?

A. Frictional force
B. Magnetic force
C. Gravitational force
D. Elastic spring force

tll A and B only

(2) B and C only
(3) A,BandConly
(4) A,B,CandD

20. What of the following statements about gravity are true?

A. Gravity is a force that can act at a distance.
B. Gravity causes obiects on Earth to have mass.
C. Gravity makes things in the air fall to the ground.
D. Gravity varies with the distance the obiect is ftom the Earth.

(1) A and B only

(2) C and D only
t3l A,CandDonly
t4l All ofthe above

P'1D Education I www.phd-education..om.sg

 I-
21. An experiment was set up as shown in the diagram below. A metal ball was released from a
F{
certain height above End G. The height at which the ball was released and the maximum height
to which the balljumped were recorded. The experiment was repeated several times using the
same ball but one of the variables was altered each time. Which of the following shows a
o
N
possible aim of the experiment and the variables, which should be kept constant? A tick (/)
indicates that the variable is kept constant.

o Metal ball released

from a certain height
J
Wooden board End G

Fixed end Spring

Length of Distance between

Position
Aim of experiment wooden metal ball and End G at
of spring
board the point of release
How the position of the
i1) spring affects how high the
ball jumped
How the position of the
(2) spring affects how high the
ball jumped
How the height of release
t3) affects how high the ball
jumped
How the height of release
(4) affects how high the ball
jumped

22. " As the ball flew towards the goalkeeper, he blocked it with both his hands and the ball
dropped onto the ground. He then caught hold ofthe ball as the ball was still bouncing."
Which effects of force are illustrated from the above situation?
A A force can make a stationary object move.
B A force can change the speed of a moving object.
C A force can change the direction of a moving obiect.
D A force can stop a moving obiecL

(1 A,BandConly
(2 B,CandDonly
(3 A,CandDonly
(4 A,BandDonly

d Ph Ll tducatior I www.phd education.com.sg

---lZZ. The graph below shows the changes in the length of a spring when various weights are
N ,*.'h"i tn i.
o
N Length ofspring/ cm

t2

Mass ofweights/ g
0 50 100 150 200

From the graph, what will be the extension ofthe spring when a 200 g weight is attached to the
spring?
(1) 6 cm
12) 8cm
(31 10 cm
(4) 12 cm

24. Peter carried out an investigation to measure the distance travelled by a battery-operated toy
car in one minute along different track surfaces made of materials A, B, C and D. He then
recorded the results ofhis investigations in the table below.

Material Distance travelled by toy car/ m

A 79.6

B 3 5.1

C 28.8

D 23.0

Based on his results, which material provides the most suitable surface for a playground slide?
(1) A
(2) B
(3) C
(4) D

25. Which ofthe following statements about frictional force are true?
A. Frictional force causes wear and tear.
B. Frictional force can help things move faster.
C. Frictional force acts in the direction that opposes motion.

(11 A and B only

(2) A and C only
(3) B and C only
(4) A,BandC

PhD Education I www. phd-education.com.sg

 I-
26. The set-up shown in the diagram below is used for the measurement of the extension of a
fn
spring of 7 cm long.
Fulcrum
o
N
Rod

Spring fixed to rod and base

Metal cube

Base

The length ofthe spring was measured each time a different number of metal cubes was placed
on the pan. The results were recorded and used to draw a line graph to show the extension of
the spring as shown belou

Extension ofspring/ cm

4.0
3.5

2.5
2

1.5
1,

0.5
Number of metal cubes
0 7234
Based on the graph, what would the length ofthe spring be if4 metal cubes were placed on the
pan?
(1) 3cm
(z) 6cm
(3) 8cm
(4) 10 cm

d PhD Fducation I www.pnd education.com. sg

 7. The figure below shows how the length ofa spring changes when a load of I kg is hung on it.
N
o
-2
5 11 cm
i
8cm
B
Load

What will the final length of the spring be when a 3 kg load is hung on it?
(11 9cm
(2) 14 cm
t3l 15 cm
(4) 17 cm

28. Which of the following are examples of a pushing force only?

A. Kicking a ball
B. Blowing a balloon
C. Sawing a wooden plank
D. Sucking a drink through a straw

(1) A and B only

(2) A and D only
(3) B and D only
(4) C and D only

29. Daniel threw a basketball into a net as shown in the diagram below

a S

Which of the following statements is/are correct?

A. There are no forces acting on the basketball at T.
B. Daniel exerted a force on the basketball at P to move it.
C. There is more gravitational force acting on the basketball at R than at Q.
D. Throughout its whole path, the basketball experiences horizontal forces only.

(1) B only
(2) A and D only
(3) A,CandDonly
(4) B,CandDonly

PhD Education I www.phd-educaaion-com.sg

d
 I-
30. The diagrams show some effects ofa force.
rJ)
o
N
o
falls
A meteor glowing as it A parachutist Brakes slowing
through Earth's atmosphere falling through air down a bicycle

What is this common force that is acting in these three situations?

t1) Friction
(2) Gravitationalforce
(3) Weight
t4) Magnetic force

31. A toy car was released from the top of two planks, M and N, which were ofthe same length.
Subsequently, the distance travelled by the toy car on the ground was measured for each plank.
It was noticed that the toy car travelled a longer distance when it was released from the top of
plank M as shown in the diagram below.

Plank M Plank N
6cm 5cm

Which ofthe following best describes the surfaces ofplanks M and N?

Plank M Plank N

t1) Wet and rough wet and smooth

(2) Wet and smooth Dry and rough
(31 Dry and smooth Dry and rough
(41 Dry and rough Wet and rough

lducation I www.phd-education.com.sg
drPht
---lZZ. The diagram below shows a metal ball hanging ftom a string.
N
o
o) Hook

String

Met2l ball

Which one of the following statements is true?

(11 There is no gravity acting on the ball so it does not fall.
(Z) There is friction pushing the ball upwards so it does not fall.
(3) There is gravity acting on the ball so the ball hangs downwards.
(4) There is magnetic force between the ball and the hook so it stays in the air.

33. A ball is kicked into the air. lt moves upwards and after a while, it changes direction and moves
downwards.

What can be concluded?

(11 The ball has mass.
(2) The ball occupies space.
(3) There is a force pulling the ball downwards.
t4l There is no upward force acting on the ball.

34. A very heavy cardboard box was pushed over a distance of 1 metre on different types of
surfaces. A stopwatch was used to measure the time taken to complete the distance on each
surface. It was ensured that the same amount of effort was used to push the box along each
surface. The results are as shown below.

Surfaces Time taken (s)

A 30

B 10

C 50

Which one of the following statements is true?

tll Surface A has the most friction.

(Z) Surface C has less friction than Surface A.
t3l Surface B has more friction than Surface C.
(4) Surface B has less friction than Surfaces A and C

PhD Education I www. phd-ed ucation.com.sg

d
35. Study the diagram below
t\
Ping pong ball -o
N
//

<-- Blow into straw

Which one of the following statements explains the result of blowing air into the straw?
1) The amount of moving air is less than the weight of the ping pong ball.
2) The hot air from the mouth heated the ping pong ball and causes it to rise.
3) The force exerted by the moving air is able to support the weight ofthe ping pong ball
4) The amount ofgravity acting on the ping pong ball is less because ofthe moving air.

36. During a Science lesson, the teacher told the students to give examples offorces at work. The
table below shows the responses from four students.

Students Examples of forces at work

Leo Stretching a rubber band

Mike Leaves falling from a tree

Tham Closing the refrigerator door

Oliver A rolling ball coming to a halt

Which students have given the correct examples of forces at work?

1) Leo and Mike only
2) Leo, Tham and Oliver only
3) Mike, Tham and Oliver only
4) All of the above

37. The table below shows the length ofa spring when different weights are hung on it.

Mass of weights/ g Length ofspring/ cm

20 7

60 9

100 11

160 l4
What is the original length of the spring?
(11 4cm
(2) 5cm
t3) 6cm
(4) Bcm

d PhD tducation I www. phd-education.com. sg

""""."."-stud
y the set-up below and answer questions 38 and 39.
N
o
@ Spring
Weight

38. Weights were continually added to the set-up even until the spring reaches its limit. Which one
ofthe following graphs shows the correct result t}lat would be obtained?
(1)
' ' Lengh ofspring/ cm (z)
' ' Length ofspring/ cm

Mass ofweights/ g Mass of weights/ g

t3l (4)
Length ofspring/ cm Length ofspring/ cm

Mass of weighs/ g Mass ofweights/ g

39. The results obtained from the experiment were tabulated in a table as shown below

Mass of weights/g 10 15 20 ZS 30
Extension/ cm 4 6 B 10 12

If the original length ofthe spring is 7 cm, what would be its total length when a 40 g weight
was added to it?

t1l 14 cm
(2) 16 cm
(3) 27cm
(4) 23cm

PID Education I www.phd-ed ucation.com.sg

Question 40
o)
An experiment is conducted to investigate ifa ball can bounce higher if water is added to the
surface on which the ball bounces. Some water is poured on a concrete surface and the ball is
- o
N
dropped from a height. The ball is then dropped two more times from the same height and the
findings are recorded in the table below.

1.r try 2"d try 3'd try Average

19 cm 27 cm 23 cm 21 cm

(a) Why does the ball have to be dropped from the same height each time? (1 m)

[b) What is the purpose of carrying out three trials for the experiment? (1 m)

[c) lt is not possible to formany conclusion from the experiment. What must be done so that a
conclusion can be formed? (1 mJ

Question 41
Gerald conducted an experiment using the set-up shown in the diagram below

Cuhe
!.{ If,r
Plate

He measured the length of the spring, h, after the cube was placed on the plate. He repeated the
experiment using cubes of different mass and volumes. His results are shown in the table below

Cuhe Mass/ g Volume/ cm3 h/ cm

A 25 30 4

B 60 30 7

C 60 40 7

(a) Based on his results, did the volume ofthe cube affect the length ofthe spring? Explain your
answer. (1 m)

(bJ Whatcouldhbeif acubeofvolume 40cm3 and mass 25 g was placed on the plate? (1 m)

d PhD lclucation www. phd-ed.cation.co m.sg

----------
Question 42
N
F An experiment is conducted to find out ifthe weight ofthe ball determines the depth ofthe dent
o made on the sand in the sand pit. The different balls are dropped from the designated positions into
the sand pit as shown in the table below.

,::rr:r:,r,r,.'..f :..+. -.:.... i,j::i::i::i..:irr- Sand pit

l, !,,.. .!, ,11,,,,..r, i

Set-up Type of ball weight of ball/ kg Position ofball

7 lron 1 A

2 Wooden 0.8 A

3 Plastic 1 B

4 lron 1 C

5 Steel 0.6 B

(aJ Which two set-ups should be used to achieve the aim? [1 m)

(bl IfSet-ups 1, 3 and 4 are used, what conclusion would be arrived at, in relation to the depth of
dent on the sand? [1 ml

(cl Which set-up would cause the deepest dent on the sand? Explain your answer. (1 m)

PhD Education I www.phd-ed::cation.com. sg

d
Question 43 --F{
An experiment is conducted with three similar cars. The cars are made to travel at different speeds
r-{
and the amount of force found in each car is measured when the cars crashed against a wall.
(aJ Write down the aim of the experiment. (1 mJ
N

(bJ Other than using similar cars, what is another variable that must be kept constant? (1 ml

Question 44
(a) Obiect X is placed at the top of a ramp as shown in the diagram below.

object x

Ramp

What is the force that stops Obiect X from moving down the slope? (1 m)

(b) Object that weighs 500 g is pulled down the ramp with a spring balance. The experiment is
X
then repeated by pulling Object X up the ramp using the spring balance.

Object x

0biect x

Ramp

The reading on the spring balance is recorded in the table below

Direction of Obiect X Reading on the spring balance

Down the ramp 300 e

Up the ramp ')

(i) Give a possible reading on the spring balance when Object X is pulled up the ramp. [% m)

(iiJ Explain why the reading on the spring balance when Object X is pulled up the ramp is
different from when Obiect X is pulled down the ramp. (1% m)

d PhD Fducation I www.phd educatron.com.sg

___________-^
uuesuon 45

f, a",,.," .", ,p a spring suspended on a retort stand as shown in the diagram below. The original
tengh of the spring is 3 cm.
i1;

Spring

Retort stand

She then hung four different obiects, A, B, C and D, in different combinations on the spring and
recorded her results in the table below.

obiects hung on the spring Length ofthe spring/ cm

A 10

A and B 20

BandD 18

A,CandD 24

Based on the above results, arrange the obiects according to their mass, from the lightest to the
heaviest. (2 mJ

Question 46
Study the diagrams below.

Diagram A Diagram B

[a) Explain why aeroplanes take the shape of Diagram A instead ofDiagram B. (2 m)

[b) A man-made satellite moving in space which has no air does not take the shape ofDiagram A.
Give a reason why the man-made satellite does not need to take the shape of Diagram A. (1 mJ

PhD Education I www. phd-education.com.sg

Question 47
r--
The graph below shows the extension ofSpring A and Spring B when loads ofdifferent masses
(n
F{
were hung on it.
N
Length ofextension/ cm
Spring A Spring B
3.5

3.0

2.5

2.0

1.5

1.0

0.5
/
Mass/ g
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400

(a) What is the mass that will cause an extension of 2 cm on Spring A? (1 m)

(bJ What is the length ofextension ifa 25 g load is hung on Spring B? (1 ml

(c) Which spring requires more force for it to be stretched? Give a reason for your answer. [1 m]

Question 48
A box with the same mass is pushed two metres across a street on Monday and Tuesday as shown
in the diagram below.

50 kg 50 kg
(

Wet surface Dry surface

Monday Tuesday

On which day will a smaller force be needed to move the box? Explain your choice. (1 mJ

d !hD Education I www.phd-e d:jca:ion.com.sg

 -..
N
F Two students, Lilian and Joy, investigated the lubricant effects ofthree liquids, A, B and C. They did

5 their experiments and recorded their observations as shown below.

Force Wooden block Force Ice cube

Glass surface Glass surface

Lilian's Set-up Joy's Set-up

Lilian's observations Joys observations

Distance moved by the Distance rnoved by
Liquid Liquid
wooden block/ cm the ice-cube/ cm
Nil 15 Nil 20

A ZO A 25

B 25 B 30

C 30 C 35

(aJ Why did the two students measure the distance moved by the objects without the lubricant?
[1 mJ

[b] The teacher commented that one of the set-ups was not a fair test. Whose set-up was not a fair
test? Why? (2 m)

PhD :d!.at:on I www.phd-ed:.;cat:on.com.sg

 r
Question 50
The graph shows the increase in the lengths of two springs, P and Q when loads are hung on them
lft
F{
Increase in length/ cm N
P
4

2 a

Load/ g
0 510 15 20

(a) Study the graph carefully and complete the table. [2 m)

Spring Initial length/ cm Load/ g Final length/ cm

P 5 6

a 5 15

(bJ In the coming shooting session, Amos needs to shoot down as many tin cans as possible, in
order to be selected to represent his club in the finals. The figure below shows a popgun that
works using a spring. When the trigger is pulled back and released, the ball will pop out ofthe
gun.

Ball Spring

Popgun

Tin cans

Which spring, P or Q, should be used in the pop gun in order to shoot down as many tin cans as
possible? Explain your answer. [2 m)

d PhD adrcation I www. phd-education.com.:g

N Three pupils conducted an experiment with three identical rubber bands. They stretched the
H, rubber bands to different lengths before letting them go. They then measured the distance that the
CN
rubber bands had travelled and obtained the following results.

Pupils Distance stretched/ cm Distance travelled/ cm

Keith 5 100
Mary 12 200
Joe 140

[a) \,Vhat was the aim of the experiment? (1 m)

[b) Their teacher noticed that only ]oe had leaned forward before releasing his rubber band. She
told them that they had not conducted a fair test. Explain why she said so. [1 m)

Question 52
Spring P and Spring Q are used to conduct an experiment. Weights are added to the springs and the
new lengths ofthe springs are measured. A graph is then drawn to represent both the results.
Length ofspring/ cm

26
24 Spring Q
22
20
18
16
14 Spring P

1,2 l-
10
8 I
6
4
2

Weight/ g
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

(aJ What was the length of the springs when 30 g was added to each of them? (2 mJ
Spring P: _ Spring Q: _
[b) Which spring was more elastic? Explain your answer. (1 mJ

?hD Educaiion I www.phd-ed::laaion.com.sg

 r-
Question 53
On the diagram below,
N
F{
(aJ draw an arrow and label it'Gravity'to show the direction gravity is acting on the wooden block N
[1 mJ
[bJ draw an arrow and label it'Friction' to show the direction friction is acting on the wooden
block [1 m)

Wooden block

Ramp

Question 54
An experiment is conducted to investigate the relationship between the length of a spring with
different number of marbles. The length of the spring is measured each time different number of
marbles are placed on the pan attached to the spring. The results are tabulated as shown below.

Length ofspring/ cm ) 8 tz 16 ?

Number of marbles 0 2 4 6 I
Length ofspring/ cm

20

12

Number of marbles
0246 I
(aJ What was the original length of the spring? (1 mJ
The original length of the spring was cm.

[b) Based on the graph plotted, what was the length ofthe spring when there were 8 marbles on
the pan? (1 m)
-
The length ofthe spring was cm.

[c) Use the information given in the table above to plot a graph in the grid provided. (2 m)
-
Education I www.phd-education.com.sg
___________-^

Nr-
I3
uuest]on
experiment
An
55
was set up as shown in the diagram below. The surface ofthe plank was covered
;\^
w with sheets made of different materials and the distance that the wooden block travelled on the
different surfaces after it was released from the position was measured.

Ruler r l llfll lr llIfl rlI I rl fll Irl fl Ir 1rlI ll rI !lIIl

Hand holding block

Wooden block

Rubber band
Hook Plank

Distance travelled/ cm
Sheets
l"tTry 2"dTry 3,d Try
A 27.8 29.8 28.2

B tt.2 72.3 9.3

C 19.8 ta.2 77 .3

(a) What is the aim of the experiment? [1 mJ

[b) Explain why the wooden block travelled a shorter distance on Sheet B as compared to Sheet C.
(1 m)

[cJ The three materials used in the experiment were flannel, plastic and sandpaper. Which of these
materials would best represent Sheets A, B and C? [3 m)
Sheet A:

Sheet B:

Sheet C:

PhD Educaaion I www. phd-education.co rr'd

 tr-
Question 56
An experiment is set up as shown in the diagram below.
o)
F{
N

The surface of the ramp is covered entirely with each of the three different types of materials:
plastic, sandpaper and wood. For each material, the ball is released in the same way at A and the
time taken for the ball to travel to B on the ramp is recorded. The experiment is repeated three
times for each material. The results are recorded in the table below.

Time taken for the ball to travel from A to B/ s

Material covering slope
1"tTry 2.d Try 3rd Try Average
Plastic 5 6 3 5

Sandpaper 7 I 6 7

Wood 6 7 5 6

[aJ What are the possible aims of the experiment? (3 m]

Aims Ticks

To find the time taken for the ball to travel down the ramp

To find out which material creates the most friction

To find out how the materials used to cover the surface of the ramp
would affect the time taken for the ball to travel from A to B.

To find out which material requires the most effort for the ball to roll
down the ramp.

To find out which type of material, when used to cover the surface of
the ramp, would allow the ball to travel down the ramp the fastest.

(b) Why was the experiment performed three times for each type of material? [1 m]

(c) What could be done to the slope covered with wood to enable the ball to roll down faster? (1 mJ

d PhD aducation I www. phd-ed ucation.com.sg

___________.I^

Nt-William set/up an experiment

(rueshon 5

19 as shown in the diagram below. He dropped a toy soldier attached to

a plastic sheet. He then recorded the time taken for it to fall vertically to the ground from a certain
!! nergnt.

Plastic sheet

Toy soldier

He recorded his findings in the table below.

Surface area ofplastic sheet/ cmz Time taken to reach the ground/ s
900
1500 12

2700 15

(aJ What is the aim of the experiment? [1 mJ

[b] Based on the table above, what can be concluded? (1 ml

(c) Describe an experiment which will determine how the mass of tle toy soldier affects the time
taken for it to reach the ground. (2 mJ

Steps Instructions
1

(d) Predict what will happen if holes are made in the plastic sheet. (1 m)

PhD Educalion I www. phd-education.com.sg

 Theme: Interactions
F{
-_N
15 Living Together N
1. Which one of the following is a community?
i1l Tadpoles and toads in a pond
(2) Cockroaches, nymphs and eggs in a drawer
(3] Butterflies, caterpillars and eggs on a plant
t4) Grasshoppers, butterflies and earthworms in a garden

2. Nelly measured the temperature in eight different locations in a garden with a datalogger. She
also counted the number ofplants found at each location. She was trying to find out ifthe
temperature affects the

t1) height of the plants

(2) rate of photosynthesis
(3) survival of plants
(4) amount of oxygen in the surroundings

3. At the Bird Park, a great number of plants are grown. How do the plant and bird populations
depend on each other?
A. Plants provide nesting places for some birds.
B. Plants provide shade and shelter for some birds.
C. Birds'droppings provide nutrients for plants.
D. Some birds feed on the plants.

i1) A,BandConly
(2) A,CandDonly
(3) B,CandDonly
t4l A,B,CandD

4. During a period of droughg the water in a pond dries up. What would happen to the population
of dragonflies near the pond?
A. There will be an increase in their population size.
B. There will be a decrease in their population size.
C. The population may move out ofthe pond area.
(11 A only
(2) A and B only
(3) only
B and C
(4) A,BandC

d PhD Education I www. phd-ed ucation.co m.sg

--_--_-I
5 A tray ofsoil is divided into four parts, M, N, O and P. Parts M and N are watered and parts O
N and M are covered. Two groups of animals are tlen put at the centre ofthe tray and the tray is
N left in direct sunlight. After two hours, the number of animals in each group in M, N, O and P is
N counted and the results are recorded in the following table.

Part Group S Group T

M 0 12

N 0 0

o 0 0

P 5 0

What can you infer from the results obtained?

A. The animals in Group S prefer bright light.
B. The animals in Group T prefer bright light.
C. The animals in Group S prefer a damp place.
D. The animals in Group T prefer a damp place.

t1l A and D only

(2) B and C only
t3l A,BandDonly
t4) A,B,CandD

6. Which one of the following insects will seriously damage plants by spreading plant diseases?
t1l Centipede
(2) Earthworm
(3) Aphid
t4) Grasshopper

7. lfthere is overcrowding ofwater hyacinth on the pond shown below, which one ofthe
following aquatic plants will not grow well in such a situation?
Water hyacinth

Cattail Moss
Water lilv

\ !.
Hydrilla

(1) Moss
12) cattail
(31 Hydrilla
(4) Water lily

PhD Educatlon I wuw.plC-edulali3n.com.sg

8. The line graph below shows the effect of temperature on the size of population of three r_-
different organisms, P, Q and R. (n
N
Size of population
N
----P
...." a
R

oC
Temperature/
45

Which organism(sJ is/are not negatively affected by a temperature ofabove 45 "C?

i1l P only
(2) R only
t3) P and Q only
(4) P,QandR

9. An experiment is conducted to find out the conditions ofwater on the population ofwater
snails. Different types ofwater are poured into four tanks and observations are done for a
week. Which tank would have the most number of water snails after one week?

Tank A Some cooking oil Tank B Some tap water

Tank C More pond water Tank D BIeach solution

t1l Tank A
(2) Tank B
(31 Tank C
t4l Tank l)

d ?hD lducation I www. phd-edr:calic.l.rrm.:g

- -_-tO. Organisms P, Q and R are placed together in the same habitat. Only one of the organisms is prey
N to ihe other two organisms. The griph below shows the populations of P, Q and R over a period
l\) of time.
5 Population of organisms
P

,.R
Time

Which of the following statements about the organisms are true?

A. prey ofQ.
R is the
B. P reproduces faster than Q.
C. There are more P than Q at the beginning.
D. There are only two occasions when two ofthe organisms reach the same population.
(11 AandBonly
(2) BandDonly
(3) A, C and D only
(41 A, B, C and D

11. The set-ups below show the pupae ofa mosquito placed in containers ofthe same size. All the
set-ups are placed in the same location. Arrange the pupae in order, from the pupa that will
survive the longest to the pupa that will survive the shortest.
Lid Lid No Lid

bPupa A
A

@
Pupa B
I
@
Pupa C

Water with 00/o oxygen Water with 100/0 oxygen Water with 50lo oxygen

(1) A,C,B
(2) C,A,B
(31 B,C,A
t4l C,B,A

p,1D Edu.31icn www. phd-ed cation.co.rl -sg

] u
 12. An experiment was set up to find out ifthe amount of soil would affect the growth of plants.
--lr)
Variables Pot X Pot Y PotZ N
Type of plant Green bean Green bean Green bean N
Number of plants 15 15 15
Height of plant 5cm 10 cm 15 cm

Amount ofsoil 500 cm3 5UU cm' 500 cm3

Type ofsoil Garden Sandy Clayey

What must be done to improve on the experiment?

A. Use plants of same height.
B. Use the same type ofsoil for each pot.
C. Use different amount ofsoil for each pot.
D. Use different number ofplants for each pot.

(1) A and B only

t2) C and D only

t3) A,BandConly
{4) A,B,CandD

13. Kim wanted to find out ifplant growth is affected by extreme weather conditions such as
drought and flood. Which one ofthe following shows correctly the variable that should be
changed and measured if she were to carry out an experiment?

Number ofset-up(s) Variable changed Variable measured

(11 L Amount of water Number of leaves dropped
(2) 1 Amount ofsunlight Height of plant
(31 3 Amount of water Number of leaves dropped

{4) 3 Amount ofsunlight Height of plant

14. An Angsana tree has two bird's nest ferns and some staghorn ferns growing. Ants, squirrels and
some sparrows live on the tree too. There are some baby squirrels too. How many populations
are sustained by the tree?
1) 5
2) 6
3) 7
4) 4

d ahD aducation I www, phd-ed ucation.com.sg

 The diagram below shows some vegetables and weeds growing on a plot of land.
TtU
N Vegetables Weeds
cll

Due to the presence ofweeds, the vegetables will not be able to grow healthily. Which one of
the following basic necessities do the plants need not compete with the weeds for?

t1) Water
(2) Oxygen
(3) Space
(4) Nutrients

16. Some fruit flies were kept in a iar with a banana in it. The iar was covered with a piece of wire
gauze as shown in the diagram below.

Gauze

lt
I Fnrit flies
t
Banana

The number offruit flies over the next few weeks was counted and plotted on a graph
Number offruit flies

Weeks
72345
Which one of the following could most likely have happened between Weeks 3 and 4?
(11 The fruit flies reproduced.
{2) He removed the banana from the iar.
t3l He added another banana into the jar.
(4) He removed all the oxygen in the jar with a chemical

phD edL.:tion I www.3hd-edrcaaion.com.sg

17. The table below shows the characteristics offour different habitats, O R and S.
P,
l\
Habitat -N
Chamcteristics
of the habitat P a R S
N
Fluctuates Fluctuates Some Little or no
Temperature
widely widely changes change

Presence of A little
Dry Very wet Damp
moisture damp
Partially
Sunlight Bright Bright Dark
shady
Some
Air/Ventilation Airy Airy Stale
ventilation
An organism is found in one ofthe habitats. The characteristics ofthe organism are recorded as
shown below.

It is sensitive to light.
It feeds on dead matter.
lt uses gills for exchange ofgases.

In which one ofthe habitats was the above organism most likely to be found?

tll P
(z) a
(3) R
(4) S

18. The population sizes offour different species ofbirds (A, B, C and D) were monitored over a
period of 30 years. The results are shown on the graph.
PoPulation

30 000

A
15 000 i,B

.,L
\--D
Year
797 6 1986 t996 2006

Which species (A, B, C or D) is in the greatest danger ofextinction?

t1l A
(2) B
t3) C
(41 t)

d PhD I-dJcation I www. phd-education.com sg

- The bar graph shows the number of some organisms in a single plant community from
-_:tS.
l\l Februarv to Mav.
N
o Number of animals

20
18
76 Squirrel
14
Fungus
L2
10
I
N Snail

6 ffi Ant
4
2
\\ N Month
Feb Mar Apr May

Which of the following statements about the organisms are incorrect?

A. There are only four types of animals in the community.
B. The population sizes of fungus and ant increased throughout the four months.
C. The population sizes ofsquirrels remained constant from March to May.
D. Two populations oforganisms showed a decrease in number from April to May.
(11 A and B only
(2) only
B and D
(3) B,CandDonly
(4) A,BandDonly

20. The diagram shows a cross-section ofa pond.

,*!r

How many populations ofaquatic plants are there?

(1 )6
(2 le
[3 )72
{4 l1s

PhD Educalion I www.phd-ed ucation.com.sg

21. Two setups as shown in the diagram below are used to investigate how the amount oflight
--o)
affects the growth ofa type ofplant. One ofthe glass tanks is wrapped with tracing paper and
the other with black paper. Both are placed in a classroom. N
Glass tank covered Glass tank covered
N
with tracing paper with black paper

I ..n
1t r|., J -\
._J
-$ $-s
- r .-- r.' - r-\
'ti
, t- - t-'- -il,
ti Plant '4l
t \itr.- -\lir Plant

Soil Soil

Which one of the following setups should be used as a control for the experiment?

(11 class tank (2)

covered with Glass tank
,t. J. newspaper T .I J
-|- -fl-
- i-' . _ ll"-' 't\ ) - l^-\ 'llA \
/:\41. /'^t.
ll,. \f_ Plant LL
.
iU-<*1.
. Plant
llI
;LT
I

Soil Soil

(31
t4) Cupboard
Glass tank
'-t _s Glass tank
rf_' u- \
ri't' ,-iit Plant ^L $- ',t. \
/*-l -xI ,/-!l
.-ll- ^ lr-' -' ir
'!,..-\...<r,-
Soil
rF' ry, rii Plant

Soil

22. An experiment is conducted to find out how temperature affects the growth ofbalsam plants.
Which of the following variables should be kept the same to make the experiment a fair one?
A. Size ofpot
B. Type of soil
C. Amount of soil
D. Location where the pot is placed

t1) A only
(2) AandBonly
(31 A, B and C only
(4) A, B, C and D

d PhD Education I www-phd-ed ucation.com.sg

 3. Some green bean seeds are planted in Pot A and Pot B as shown in the diagram below. The pots
N are placed in the open space so that the pots are exposed to the same amount ofsunlight. The
-z(A)
o same amount ofwater and soil are also given to each pot.

Pot A Pot B

The average height ofthe plants in each pot is recorded daily. The heights ofthe plants are
plotted on a graph. Which one ofthe following graphs shows the likely average heights ofthe
plants in Pot A and Pot B correctly?

[1) Average height ofplants/ cm (2) Average height ofplants/ cm

A A

B
B

Number ofdays Number ofdays

(3) Average height ofplants/ cm (4) Average height ofplants/ cm

B

B
A
A

Number ofdays Number of days

24. Which of the following statements about decomposers is/are true?

A. Bacteria and maggots are decomposers.
B. Decomposers break down dead matter and animal waste.
C. Decomposers enrich the soil with nutrients for plants to grow.
(11 A only
(2) BandConly
(3) AandConly
{4) All of the above

PhD ¤ducation I www.phd-education.co ;G@[

25. An experiment is set up as shown in the diagram below. The same plant is used in all the three r-
set-ups and the plants are given the same amount of water every day. For Set-ups X and Y, F{
lamps with the same light intensity are used. (n
Wooden box
N
White light Green light

Set-up X Set-up Y Set-up Z

Which ofthe following hypotheses are possible for the above experiment?
A. The presence of light affects the growth ofthe plant.
B. The colour ofthe light affects the growth ofthe plant.
C. The presence ofwater affects the growth ofthe plant.
(1) A and B only
(2) B and C only
i3l A and C only
(4) A,BandC

26. Some students did their research by counting the number of plants and animals in the pond
Their findings are presented below.

Pond Community

Animals Plants

No legs 2 legs 6 legs 8 legs Floating Partially Totally

(10) (6) (4s) [2 s) i60) submerged submerged
t27) (43)

Based on the findings given above, which of the following statements are true?

A. There are only 7 populations in the communiq/.

B. There are only 3 populations ofplants in the community.
C. There are more plants than animals in the community.
D. There are more animals with 6 legs than 8 legs in the community.
1l A and B only
2) C and D only
3) A,CandDonly
4) A,BandConly

I dr.calic- e .t, w ;'rd eoJCation.con.sF

 pie charts below show the populations of two different rotting log communities, A and B
N
(1, Earthworms
-z7.The Ants
lv Earthworms
240/o
760/o
l5o/o
Termites
33o/o

Centipedes
300/o
Centipedes
Millipedes 32o/o
Slugs
28o/o Ants L2o/o
l0o/o

Rotting Log Community A Rotting Log Community B

Which of the following statements about the two communities are correct?
A. There are no millipedes in Community A.
B. There are more ants in Community A than B.
C. There are no slugs and termites in Community A.
D. There is a lower percentage of earthworms in Community A than B

t1l A only
12) C only
t3) B and C only
(4) C and D only

28. Some insecticides were sprayed to prevent Insects A and B from destroying the crops in the
field. The population changes ofthe two insects before and after the insecticide was sprayed on
the crops were tracked.
Numher of insecls

Insect A
Insect B

Months

Which ofthe following are possible reasons for Insects A and B to return to their original
numbers after some time?
A. Other types of insects joined the community.
B. The farmer stopped spraying insecticide.
C. A healy rain washed away the insecticide.
D. The insects were not affected by the insecticide
(11 A and B only
(2) B and C only
(3) A,BandDonly
t4) All ofthe above

PhD fd.j.ailcn I www.phd-ed rcat:.n..om.sg

29. An experiment is carried out to find out which species of ladybird, R or S, can better control the -l(!
population ofaphids in the plantation. Two Ladybirds R are put in Set-up A and two Ladybirds
S are put in Set-up B. Five aphids are also put ireach set-up ind left undisturbed 6o. 1-6 66tr15. (Yl
Mesh wire netting N
t____
R
#
Ladybirds APhids Ladybirds S Aphids
*..t i-.r
";Yrv
Plant
Water
iF Water
iF F
Set-up A Set-up B

Which set-up can be used to determine which species ofladybird to use to control the aphids
after the experiment?
(1 The set-up which has the most amount of water left.
(z The set-up which has the least amount of leaves left.
(3 The set-up which has the least number of aphids Ieft.
(4 The set-up which has the most number of ladybirds left.

30. The graph below shows the relationship between the number of two species ofplants, X and Y,
and the temperature in the environment.

Number of plants

Y
oC
Temperature/
25 30 35 40 45 50

Four pupils came up with four different statements to describe the graph.
Lindsey The best temperature to grow Plant X is 30 'C.
Leo: The higher the temperature, the fewer the number of Plant X.
Joe: The higher the temperature, the fewer the number of Plant Y.
Jane: There are more of Plant X than Plant Y between 25 'C and 40 "C.
Whose statement about the group is correct?
(11 Lindsey and Leo only
(2) Lindsey and Joe only
(31 Lindsey, Leo and fane only
t4l Lindsey, foe and fane only

d thD tducation I www.plC-e*::c;1icn.com.sg

-
^_-Sf
N
The classification chart below groups some organisms according to their habitats.

w
s 0rganisms

Habitat A Habitat B Habitat C

Fungi Arrowhead Ladybird

Termite Tubifex worms Caterpillar
Centipede Dragonfly nymph Bougainvillea
I K Praying mantis nymph

Which one of the following could be Organisms J and K?

I K

t1l Hydrilla Wriggler

(z) Butterfly Woodlouse
(31 Earthworm Balsam

(41 Woodlouse Backswimmer

32. Flowers and bees are interdependent on each other. \iVhich one of the following best describes
their relationship?

Flower Bee

t1l The flower provides a resting place for the bee The bee fertilises the flower

(2) The flower provides nectar for the bee to feed on The bee pollinates the flower

(31 The flower provides nectar for the bee to feed on The bee fertilises the flower.

t4l The flower provides a resting place for the bee. The bee pollinates the flower

f :rD Edu.alion I www. phd-:C::caaion.corn.sg

33. The diagram below shows the two types ofwater plants found in a school pond.
r
rJ1
Water plant H
(n
N
Water plant G

It was observed that the number of Water plant G decreased when the number of Water plant H
increased tremendously. Which one ofthe following factors has the greatest impact that has led
to the decrease in the number of Water plant G?
1) Space
2) Sunlight
3) Nutrients
4) Dissolved oxygen

34. Some observations made on a high mountain were recorded in the table below

Height of mountain/ m Estimated number oftrees seen

100 150

700 55

1800 18

3600 0

Which one ofthe following statements is a correct inference statement that could be made from
the observations noted?

t1) There are no trees found at the height of 3600 m.

(2) The flowers ofthe trees are brighter as they go higher above the mountain.
t3l Most trees could not survive high up the mountain.
(4) Trees higher up the mountain are shorter than those lower down the mountain

35. Weeds are small unwanted plants growing in our gardens. It is important to remove these
weeds so as to ensure that the plants we want to grow have sufficient
A. water
B. nutrient
C. sunlight
t1l A and B only
{z) A and C only
t3) B and C only
(4) All ofthe above

d PhD Io-u,r:i t r i'r,ww.prd-eoucation.com.s4

"""-"."""-".3
6. The table below shows how some animals are grouped according to their habitats.
N
w Habitat Animals
or II dolphin, starfish, whale
V termite, wood scorpion, earthworm
W frog water snail, great diving beetle
x mudskipper, snake, crab

In which ofthe habitats, U, V, W or X, is/are a crocodile most likely to be found?

(1) U only
(2) Vonly
t3l U and W only
t4) W and X only

37. An experiment is set up to find out what kind of conditions would be the most favourable for
decomposition to take place. Four identical slices ofbread were placed at four different places
They were left there undisturbed for five days.

In the garden In the kitchen air-tight cover

Sprinkled with water Completely dry

Bread A Bread B

In the freezer In the refrigerator

Plastic sheet

Sprinkled
with water Water

Bread C Bread D

Which bread would be the first to decompose after five days?

(1) A
(2) B
t3l C

t4) D

PhD Education I www.phd-educati3n..om.sg

 I-
38. A plantation was infested with two types of aphids, A and B. The farmer wanted to use
ladybirds to remove the aphids. He did the following experiment to find out which type of l\
Ladybird W, X, Y or Z was the most effective. He put 50 Ladybird W in the first cage and the m
same number ofLadybird X, Ladybird Y and Ladybird Z in the second, third and fourth cage N
respectively. He also put 200 Aphid A and 200 Aphid B in each ofthe four cages. The number of
each type ofaphid left in each cage is shown in the table below.

Number of aphids left

Cage with
AphidA Aphid B
Ladybird W 19 269

Ladybird X 25 200
Ladybird Y 121 143
Ladybird Z 140 754

\,Vhich type of Ladybird [W, X, Y or ZJ should he introduce to remove as many Aphid A and
Aphid B as possible from his plantation?
(1) Ladybird W
{2) LadybirdX
t3l Ladybird Y
(4) Ladybird Z

PhD Idrca:ion I www.phd-educaticn.t.m.sg

 39
Nl- The diagram below shows an angsana tree community in a reservoir park.
(p
-ouestion
6

[aJ There are _ populations oforganisms in the tree. (1 m)

(bJ How are the monkeys dependent on the angsana tree? (1 m)

[cJ How is the angsana tree dependent on the animals living in it? (1 m)

Question 40
Madam Mah keeps lots ofplants in her apartment. She read in the magazine that plants grow better
ifyou play music near them. She decided to devise some suitable steps for an experiment to test
whether it is true. Rearrange the following sentences, using numbers 1 to 7 to show the correct
order of steps Madam Mah should take. Step [1] has been done for you. (3 mJ

Steps Order
State the hypothesis.

Make a plan

Construct an idea. 1

Carry out the plan.

Check the hypothesis

Design the experiment.

Draw a conclusion

PhD Educaaian I www. phd-ed ucalia..com.sg

Question 41 --
or
Three soil samples, X, Y and Z, were collected. Each sample was put in a funnel which had been
m
plugged with some cotton wool. A beaker was placed under each funnel before 100 ml of water was
poured into each soil sample. The amount ofwater that was collected in each beaker was recorded
N
as shown in the table below.

Soil Sample Amount of water collected/ ml

x 80

Y 95

Z 45

(al What is the aim of the experiment? (1 m)

(bJ What type of soil is Sample Y? (1 m)

(c) Why is Sample Y not suitable for growing most plants? (1 m)

Question 42
An experiment was set up as shown in the diagram below

Plant Glass tank

Decomposing
fruit

Soil

[a) How is the decomposing fruit useful to the plant? (1 mJ

(b) Name two conditions which are necessary for decomposition to take place. (1 m)
(D

tii)

d PhD tducatio,,) | www.phd education.com.5g

 N) There were five pots, each
!5 pot containing ten small cabbage plants. Each plant was 4-5 cm tall and each
-oues$on-4-3
^ar
v had the same amount ofsoil in it. On the day after the cabbages were planted, different
amounts of liquid fertiliser were added to each pot. From then on, the plants were watered with the
same amount each day. The growth ofthe plants was observed over 10 days. The results are shown
below.

Amount of liquid Observations after 10 days

Pot
fertiliser added Leaves Average Height
1 None Pale green leaves Bcm
2 5ml Green leaves 72 cm

3 10 ml Green Ieaves 15 cm

4 15 ml Green leaves 16 cm

5 20 ml Yellow leaves 8cm

(a) What was the aim of the investigation? (1 m)

[b) What conclusion can you draw from the results? Explain your answer. (2 m)

Question 44
A school pond was found to have many mosquito eggs. To prevent the mosquitoes from breeding,
the school gardener sprayed a thick layer of oil over the surface of the pond.

[aJ How would the gardener's action affect the aquatic plants in the school pond? Explain your
answer. [2 mJ

(bJ How can the gardener get rid of mosquitoes without polluting the pond? ( 1 m)

PhD Education I www. phd-education.com.sg

d
 r-
Question 45
F{
This is a diagram ofan Eco-pond.
sf
Dragonfly Water
N
hyacinth Frog
Duckweed Pond
Arrowhead skater
Waterlily

Hydrilla
tr
Water snail

Guppy rape grass

G,/
Tadpoles

Cabomba

(aJ How many populations oforganisms can you find in the diagram above? (1 m)

[b) Describe the interdependence ofthe guppy and hydrilla found in this habitat. [2 mJ

Question 46
The diagram below shows an experimental set-up using three different types of soil, P, Q and R

Water Water Water

Soil P Soil Q Soil R

Measuring Measuring
cylinder cylinder

Water Water

Equal amount ofwater was poured into the filter funnels. Paddy (rice plantsl needs a lot of water to
grow well. Which one of the above types of soil will be most suitable for growing paddy? Explain
your answer. (1 mJ

d PhD Education I www.phd-edL.:cation.com.sg

---------I
Question 47
N
5 Samples were collected from five different ponds, V, W, X, Y and Z, and poured into five identical

N beakers. A torch is then shone over each ofthese beakers as shown in the diagram below.

Light sensor

A light sensor measures the amount of light that passes through the beaker ofwater flight
intensityJ. The table below shows a simple description ofthe set-ups and the results.

Sample Amount of water/ ml Light intensity

V 100 Dim
W BO Very dim

x 100 Verydim
Y 100 Bright
Z 80 Bright

(a) Which water sample provides the most favourable condition for fully-submerged plants to
grow in? [1 m)

(b) Explain how the experiment can be made a fair one. (1 m)

PhD Education I www-phd-education.com.sg

d
 I-
Question 48
(n
The yield ofwheat has been greatly affected by the large number ofgrasshoppers in the wheat
sf
field. An experiment is conducted to find out which brand of pesticide is the most suitable in getting
rid of the grasshoppers in the wheat field in order to increase the yield of wheat. All the plots are of
N
the same size with the same amount and the same type of soil. It is also ensured that the same
number of wheat plants and grasshoppers is used at the start of the experiment and all the plots
are netted to contain the grasshoppers. Each plot is also given the same amount of water and
exposed to the same amount ofsunlight. The findings are recorded in the table as shown below.

At the start ofthe At the end ofthe

experiment experiment
Number of
Set up Pesticide Number of Number of
Number of surviving
wheat
grasshoppers surviving
plants wheat grasshoppers
plants
Plot A Brand P 100 50 55 30
Plot B Brand Q 100 50 42 B

Plot C Brand R 100 50 90 45

Plot D Brand S 100 50 7A 13

[aJ State another variable that must be kept the same in order to ensure a fair test. (1 mJ

(b) At the end of the experiment, it is decided to use Brand S pesticide to control the number of
grasshoppers in the wheat field. Give the reason for this choice. (2 m)

d PhD Edrcat;on I www.phd-education.t.r..sg

----------
Question 49
N
5
D
Studies were carried out on some animals living in a forest. The results were shown in the graph
below.

Number of animals

600

500

400

300

200

100

0 Year
'99 '.00 '01 '02 '03 '04 '05 '06

[a) How much did the population increase between 1999 and 2001? (1 m)

(bJ Name one possible factor that led to the decline between 2004 and 2005. [1 mJ

Question 50

Number of Organism G

A
C
Months
012345678
The above graph shows the population of Organism G over a period of 7.5 months.
(a) Describe what happens to the population of Organism G in the first four months. (1 mJ

[b) List two possible reasons for the fall in the number of Organism G from B to C. (2 m)

PhD Education I www.phd-educalion.com-sg

 l-
Question 51
tn
Henry performed an experiment with 15 earthworms. They were placed on a tray under an
$
inverted dish as shown in the diagram. A different type offood was placed at each corner ofthe
tray.
N
Pieces ofbark wffiffiE Fallen leaves
WBBB AD
WKffiB
Tray
BNBB

-r#
G
Earthworms
Inverted dish

Bread crumbs Dead plant matter

After the inverted dish was removed, the earthworms were left alone. After an hour, the number of
earthworms at each corner was counted. The results were recorded in the table below.

Type offood Number ofearthworm

Pieces ofbark 3
Fallen leaves 4
Dead plant matter 6
Bread crumbs 2

[aJ What was the aim of the experiment? [1 mJ

(bJ Henry made two mistakes in this experiment and ended with an unfair test. What should he do
to make his test a fair one? [2 m)

d PhD Eo-carion I www.phd-educatio').con.sg

 Question 52
N
5
Or
The diagram shows a bottle garden

Cork

Clear glass bottle

Moist soil

Dead leaves

(a] The plants in the bottle do not require fertiliser and water. With little attention, they can
remain healthy for a few years. Explain why this is so. (2 mJ

(b) Suggesta possible reason why the bottle garden should not be put in a place where it is
exposed to direct sunlight. (1 ml

Question 53
(a) Margaret wanted to find out if the water from different ponds affects the survival of fishes in it.
In the table below, help Margaret tick (/) the variables that should be kept constant in the set-
up ofher experiment. [2 m)

Amount of water
Type of water
Number of fish
Type of fish
Temperature ofwater

(bJ Keith placed a potted plant in a wooden cupboard for a few days without watering it. He placed
a similar potted plant under the sunlight and watered it every day. After a few weeks, the plant
in the cupboard died while the other plant exposed to sunlight grew healthily. Keith concluded
that plants need both sunlight and water to grow. Based on the above information, do you think
Keith has conducted a fair test? Give a reason to support your answer. [2 mJ

P,1D Education I www.phd-ed ucation.co ;,.'

@[
Question 54 --
N
The graph below shows the changes in the population size ofthree organisms, A, B and C.
sf
Size ofpopulation N
C

Time
0 ¤
x

(aJ Based on the graph above, which two organisms (A,B,CJ were most likely having conditions that
were not affecting them negatively to a large extent? (1 ml

(b) Observe the population size ofOrganism C in the above graph. What can you conclude about
the population size ofOrganism C for the time period indicated by X in the graph above?
Suggest a reason for your answer. Hint: Explain in terms of the birth rate and death rate ofthe
organism. [1 m]

Question 55
The effects ofcarbon dioxide on the organisms living in a pond over a period ofsix months were
investigated. The observations were recorded in the table below.

Size of population
Concentration of Organism Organism Organism Organism
carbon dioxide (mgll) E F G H

1 270 98 105 75

5 z4a 77 51 4B

10 265 50 24 22
15 282 35 11 9

d PhD Education I www. phd-education.com.sg

-
--I(r)
Nt-
Which one of the following could Organism E be? Circle your answer. (1 m)

5 Omnivorous Carnivorous Water plants Herbivorous

6 animals animals animals

[b) Using the information above, state how the concentration ofcarbon dioxide affected the
population size ofeach organism. [1 m)

(c) Which organism was most affected by the increase in carbon dioxide in the pond? Explain the
data from the table which shows this. (1 m)

Question 56
In an experiment, Joel wanted to find out the most suitable living condition for Organism X to live
in. He divided a tray into two parts A and B. He filled Part A with wet soil and Part B with dry soil.
He then covered Part A with a piece ofblack paper and Part B with a piece oftransparent plastic.

B - Dry soil

He placed the tray in the hot sun. He then released a number oforganism X in the middle ofthe tray
in the area marked by the circle. After one hour, greater number of Organism X was found in Part A.
He obtained the same result after repeating the experiment three times.

(a) Why did he place Organism X in the middle and not at the side of the tray? (1 m)

(b) Why did he repeat the experiment three times? (1 mJ

(c) Identiry the natural habitat of Organism X. (1 m)

PhD Education I www.phd-education.com.sg

Question 57
or
Herman set up an experiment as shown below to investigate how maggots respond to their
- sf
environment. The box is divided into two parts, x and Y. He put five live maggots into Part X and
three live maggots into Part Y at the beginning ofthe experimenL The maggots can move freely
N
between the two parts through a small opening A.

Lighted bulb Opening A

Black cloth

5 live maggots 3 live maggots

Wire netting

Moist cotton wool Silica Bel (to absorb water)

Herman's friend said that his set-up was not correct. Suggest two ways to improve his set-up. (2 mJ

d PhD Educalion I www. phd-education.com.sg

---_---f
Theme: Interactions
N
UI
o t6 Food Chains and Food Webs
1. Study the food chain below.

A ----------------
B """""""" C ----------------+ I)

Which one of the following food pyramids shows the populations of the organisms A, B, C and D
in the above food chain?

(1) (2)

(31 t4)

2. The diagram below shows a food web.

F
D
I
E
C B
1
I P lan t
A

The letters A to F represent food consumers. Which ofthese food consumers are both predators
and preys?

t1) AandC
(2) A and F
t3l BandE
(4) DandE

PhD Education I www-phd-education.com.sg

 r-
3. A food web is drawn based on the following information. However, two of the arrows have
been drawn incorrectly. F{
ln
C is acarnivore.
D is an omnivore.
N
B is eaten by D only.
B and F are herbivores.
A and E are food producers.
2, 3
A B C

7 ./t I t,
I
F E D
6 5

Which ofthe arrows have been drawn incorrectly?

t1) Land6
(2) 3 and 7
(3) 2and4
t4l 5and8

4. Organism X and Organism Y were put together in an aquarium. Organism X is the prey of
Organism Y. The number oforganisms left in the aquarium was noted at the end ofeach week.

Number of fish
x

Number ofweeks

Based on the graph above, which ofthe following statements are true?
A. Organism X started to reproduce before Organism Y.
B. Organism X reproduced faster than Organism Y could eat them.
C. There are more Organism Y than Organism X at the end ofthe experiment.
D. There are more Organism X than Organism Y at the start ofthe experimenl
(1) A,BandConly
(2) A,BandDonly
(3) B,CandDonly
(4) A,B,CandD

Education I www.phd-education.com.sg
""".""-."."-s
A food web is drawn as shown below.
N
ut B F

N C
D
I
A E

Which one of the following statements is true?

(1) Organisms E and F depend directly on Organism A.
(2) There is a predator, which is also a prey.
(31 Three ofthe organisms are herbivores and two ofthe organisms are omnivores.
(4) The populations ofall the organisms will increase ifOrganism A becomes extinct.

The food web below shows the food relationship among several organisms in a pond community
Use the food web to answer questions 6 and 7.

Great diving beetle

Baby tilapia
Tadpole

Water plant """""""" Water snail

-------r
Kingfisher

Dragonfly nymph """""+ Water stick insect

6. How many food chains are there in the above food web?

tl) 4
(2) s
t3l 6
t4l 7

7. Which of these organisms are both a prey and a predator?

t1) Tadpole and baby tilapia only

(2) Dragonfly nymph and great diving beetle only
t3) Water snail, dragonfly nyrnph and great diving beetle only
t4) Kingfisher, water stick insect, dragonfly nymph and great diving beetle only

PhD Education I www. phd-ed ucation.com.sg

8. The following diagram shows how the energy from the Sun is transferred to Organisms X, Yand-
Z. (n
rn
s un N
provides light enerry to

directly or indirectly provides food for

x Y

when it dies, it is
broken down by
produces nutrients, water and produces waste which
carbon dioxide that can be used by z is broken down by

Which ofthe following correctly represent X, Y and Z?

x Y z
(1) Goat Woodlouse Grass

(z) Seaweed Earthworm Cat

(31 Grass Ox Mushroom

(41 Bacteria Rice Wolf

9. A mango fruit ripened and fell to the ground. It was left undisturbed for a week. Birds were
seen feeding on the fruit during this period.
Number of birds

1B
C I
I
'.:-. tI

V
)..
D
Weeks
0 1, 2 3

Which one of the graphs, A, B, C or D, shows the number ofbirds visiting the fruit during that
week?
(11 A
(2) B
(3) C
(4) D

d PhD Education I www. phd-education.com. sg

 study tie food web below.
N
(/r
-10. Gooty Dooty

F Zooly
Wooty <- Looty

Footy

What is the common source of energy for Looty and Dooty?

(1) Sun
(Z) Wooty
t3l Footy
(41 Gooty

11. The food chain shown below is observed in a pond.

z
A large population ofherbivores which feed on X is introduced into the pond where they do not
have any predators. Which ofthe following would happen in the pond after two weeks?
A. Population ofX would decrease.
B. Population ofY would decrease.
C. Population ofZ would decrease.
(1) A only
(2) AandConly
t3l BandConly
(41 All ofthe above

12. The food web below shows how some animals depend on one another in the ocean.

Algae ---------------- Coral ---------------, Parrotfish ---------------- Barracuda

The following pie chart is used to present the number ofthese organisms of the above food
chain.

Which ofthe following represents the relationship among the organisms correctly?

A B c D

t1l Coral Parrotfish Barracuda Algae

(2) Algae Coral Parrotfish Barracuda

(3) Parrotfish Algae Coral Barracuda
(4) Barracuda Parrotfish Coral Algae

PhD Education I www.pid-education.com.sg

d
 I_-
13. Study the following food web below.
u1
Tilapia Kingfisher rr|
Water plant
N
Shrimp Snakehead

Tadpole -----------+ Dragonfly nymph

Which of the following statements about the food web are true?
A. Energy from the shrimp is totalty passed to the kingfisher.
B. Only the dragonfly nymph, snakehead and the kingfisher are carnivores.
C. Tilapia is the only food source for the kingfisher.
D. The shrimp, dragonfly nymph and tilapia are both a prey and a predator.

tll AandBonly
(2) BandConly
t3) AandDonly
t4) CandDonly

14. Study the garden food web below.

CONSUMERS Lizard Mynah bird

Carnivores Praying mantis Spider

Herbivores Snail Grasshopper Butterfly Bee

caterpillar

PRODUCERS Hibiscusplant Lime plant lxora plant

Which one of the following statements is not true about the above food web?
(1) All the herbivores are preys.
(2) There are more preys than predators.
t3) There are four food chains with only three organisms in each.
t4) Ifthe mynah bird population is removed, the plant population will eventually decrease

d phD tducdtion www.phd edLcation.com.sg

I
 In the food web shown below , P, Q, R, S and T represent animals
N ---+
ut
-15. P Q
(r)
Plants

R -----------'---') S rT
Which one ofthe following shows how the populations of P, Q, R and T are likely to be affected
immediately if there is a decrease in the population of S in a habitat?

(1) Number of animals (21 Number of animals

R
a
T a

P
P
R T
Time Time

[3J Number of animals (4J Number of animals R

T
P
R
T
a P
a
Time Time

16. The bar graph below shows the populations of five organisms, V, W,X,Y and Z, in a food chain
in a field community.
Population size

0rganism
VWXYZ
Which one of the following is a predator of Organism X?

tl)
(Z)
v
W
(3) Y
(41 z

PhD Education I www.phd educaalon.com.sg

d
17. Study the four food chains given below. r-
A B l\
---------------- D
ln
A --+
C ------------r' D N
A ------+
--------------+ C --""""""+ B D
--------r
E B D
-----__>
Which of the following food--+
webs can be formed using the above food chains?

(1) E (2) E

,/,
A C D A B D

B C

(3) C (4) E

A B D A B D

E C

18. Study the food chain in a freshwater pond as shown below carefully

Plankton ----------> Water flea ---------) Water boatman Tilapia

Which one ofthe following graphs shows the likely sizes ofthe four populations in a balanced
freshwater pond community?

(11 (2)
Tilapia Tilapia
Water boatman Water boatman
Water flea Water flea
Plankton Plankton

Number oforganisms Number oforganisms

t3) (41
Tilapia Tilapia
Water hoatman Water boatman
Water flea Water flea
Plankton Plankton

Number of organisms Number of organisms

d PhD Education I www. phd-education.com.sg

- The graph below shows the population size of a predator and its prey living in a forest over a
-_]tS.
lV few vears.
ul
6 Population size

Prey

-' Predator
Time

Which one ofthe statements below are we most sure of to be true based solely on the graph
above?
(1) The predator's population dropped because of deforestation.
(2) As the population ofthe predator increases, the population of the prey also increases.
(31 The population ofthe prey would continue to increase ifthe population ofthe predator
increases.
(4) The population ofthe prey decreases initially, remains constant for some time and then
starts to increase again.

20. Study the food chain below.

Plant ---------------- Butterfly Spider Bird

Ifthere is a sudden huge decrease in the population ofspiders due to an outbreak ofdisease,
which one ofthe following graphs shows the likely changes in the populations ofplant,
butterfly and bird?

(1) Population (2) Population

Butterfly Butterfly

Plant
Plant
Bird Bird
Time Time

(3) Population (4) population

Plant
Butterfly
Butterfly
Bird
Plant
Bird
Time Time

PhD Educat,on I www.phd-education.com.sg

Ouestion 21
C')
The following organisms are living in a community near a farm.
]n
Caterpillar N
Chicken
Plant

Rabbit Eagle

Cow Man
----------------
(aJ State one predator-prey relationship found in the community. (1 mJ

fbl Ifthe population ofcaterpillar was destroyed by a disease, explain the effect on the population
ofchickens. (1 m)

Question 22
Study the food web below.
Owl

Spider---'-"""""' Mouse Blackbird

Lizard
Grasshopper M o th
Tree

Grass Fern s

(a) How many food chains are interconnected in the above food web? (1 m)

[b] lfall the mice were killed, would the population oftree be affected? Give reasons to support
your answer. (2 mJ

[c) If you want to reduce the population ofspiders in the shortest periodof time, how would you
change the population size of two other organisms in the above food web? (1 m)

d PhD Educati.i I www. phd-aducatior..cm.sg

 t\l- Study the23information given below carefully
O)
-ouestion
o o S preys on Q.
. S and T are both a prey and a predator.
o Q and R depend on P only for food.
o V and T are carnivores.
(aJ Complete the food web below using the above criteria. [3 m]

(bJ What do the arrows in the food web indicate? (1 m)

Question 24
The figure below shows a food web in a rice field.

Grasshopper Spider

Rice Rat

Snake Hawk
---------_"""+
After a population of Animal Y was released into the field, the number ofrats decreased and the
number of grasshoppers increased.

[a) Which organism did Animal Y feed on? Assume that Y did not feed on the rats. Explain your
answer. [2 mJ

(b) Ifthe farmer wanted to reduce the population ofsnakes in the shortest period of time, how
would he change the population sizes of two other organisms in the above food web? Give an
explanation for each ofthe changes. [2 mJ
Change 1:
Change 2:

PlD !ducation I www. phd-*d lcation..om.sg

 I--
Question 25
F{
Study the food chains below. ro
Plants -----' Termites Moon rat -------> Python Eagle N
Plants ------+ Termites Moon rat -------> Civet Python ------+ Eagle

Plants --"---+ Termites Monitor lizard -------) Civet ---+ Python -----.+ Eagle

Plants -------) Ants Moon rat Python -------r Eagle

->
Plants -------> Ants Moon rat -------> Civet

Plants -------) Ants Monitor lizard Civet ------+ Plthon ------+ Eagle
-|
Plants -------) AnLs Moon rat -------) Civet ------. Python ------+ Eagle

Complete the food web below with the correct organisms. (3 m)

Plants -------------r Termites ---------+

Question 26
Study the food web shown below.

Plant ------------+ Grasshopper -------------+ Lizard

Caterpillar Frog Eagle

Snail """"""""| Mynah

(a) Ifall the herbivores in the food web were killed, state two possible outcomes for the carnivores.
Give a reason for each outcome. [2 m)
(D

tiD

(b) Ifthe different populations in the food web are kept in balance, are there likely to be more
lizards or more grasshoppers? Give a reason for your answer. [2 m)

d PhD lducation I www. phd-education.com.sg

___________-^
tlltesnon I /
web s hown
$ r"
"d
be I ow.
N Eagle <- Snake
-.ro**
Crow Lizard

Mynah

Grasshopper Snail

Grass + Caterpillar

[a) How many complete food chains are there in this food web? (1 m)

(b) List all the organisms which are both a prey and a predator. (2 m)

Ouestion 28
Study the food web below carefully
A

B F

I
E c

(al List the food producer(s). (1 m)

(b) List the carnivore(s). [1 mJ

(c) In the food web, insert another organism X which is an omnivore. Draw two appropriate
arrows to show that X is an omnivore. (1 m)

PhD Education I www.phd-education.com.sg

Ouestion 29 --
Stephanie caught three types of animals from her garden. She put them in two tanks and observed
m
(o
how they interacted for a period of time. She gave them sufficient water and air. She recorded the
changes in their populations and plotted the results in the two graphs below.
N
Number of animals Number ofanimals

c. A
"-"-'.
A

Num ber of days Number of days

Tank 1 Tank 2

[a) Using the above information, construct a possible food chain if the three animals were placed in
one tank together with a plant. (1 mJ

[b) Howwould the population ofOrganism C be affected ifthe population ofOrganism B faces
extinction? [1 mJ

Question 30
The food web below shows seven populations of organisms living in a community
A

B F

C G

D E

[aJ Based only on the food web above, fill in the blanks in the table below with the appropriate
letters, A, B, C, D, E, F and C.

Type of organism Letter[s)

til Food producer

(iD Herbivore
(iiD Carnivore
(iv) Omnivore

d iiD Edr.31irn I www. phd-edL:calio.t.com.sg

 Using the following information, add in Organism x in the food web above.
ItUt
Of [iJ Organism X is a carnivore.

S [iiJ When the population ofOrganism X increases, the population ofOrganism B decreases.
(iii)When the population of Organism X decreases, the population of Organism C decreases.

Question 31
Judy carried out an experiment to study the feeding habits offour different animals. The
experiment was carried out over a period of two days. The following steps were taken to carry out
the experiment.
(iJ Put the animals separately into four cages.
(iiJ Put 100 g ofvegetables and 100 g ofmeat in each cage.
(iiiJWeigh the food that is left in every cage at the end ofthe two days.
The results ofher experiment are given in the graph as shown below.

Mass offood at the end of two days/ g

100 a_
I
l o
90 I
I

o
I

80
70
?
60 o Kev
50 O Vegetables
40 a O Meat
30
20
10
0 Animals
ABCD
[aJ f udy has forgotten to draw in the results for Animal C. There is 40 g of vegetables and 100 g of
meat left in its cage. Using the key given, draw the results for Animal C in the graph above.
(1 mJ

(b) Based on the results of the experiment, classiry the four animals, A, B, C and D, into three
categories in the classification chart below. Fill in the appropriate headings for the three
categories. (3 m)

Animals

Headings

Animals

PhD Education I www. ph d-e ducation..om.sg

Question 32 --rn
The graph below shows the areas covered by grass in a field (o
Area covered by grass N

Time

[a) Mark with an 'X' on the graph above to show when a new animal population was introduced
into the field community. (1 mJ

(b) What type of animal do you think was introduced into the field community? (1 mJ

(c) Explain how this type of animal in part (b) could cause the change in the area covered by grass
[2 mJ

Question 33
A farmer's crop, X, has been attacked by Pest Y. He wants to get rid of Pest Y with the help oftheir
natural predators instead of using pesticide. Study the food web belou
T

I
Y

I
x Z

Which predatorfsJ ofY should the farmer introduce into his farm so that he can have the best
harvest ofhis crops? Give a reason for your answer. [2 mJ

PhD :drcation I www. phd-education..or..sg

---------r
Theme: Interactions
N
O)
cll L7 Adaptations
1. A hermit crab pushes itself into an empty shell for protection. [t then finds a sea anemone and
places it on top ofits shell. The sea anemone provides the crab with useful camouflage while
the crab provides the sea anemone with scraps of leftover food.

Sea anemone Empty shell

Crab

Which one of the following describes a similar relationship as the sea anemone and the crab?

t1l Fleas found on a dog.

(2) A bird catching a worm.
(31 A bee collecting nectar from a flower.
(4) A caterpillar feeding on a balsam leaf.

2. Study the information on Plant Y.

The roots can absorb a lot ofwater.
The fruit is fibrous.
It requires a lot of sunshine to grow well.
Which one of the following habitat is Plant Y most likely to be found?

t1l Seashore
(2) Desert
(31 Leaf litter
(4) Rotting log

3. Which ofthe following statements are true about angsana seeds?

A. It is dispersed by wind.
B. The seed has a wing-like structure.
C. The seed has a waterproofhusk.
(11 Aand Bonly
(Z) BandConly
t3l AandConly
t4l A, B and C only

ParD Edlcation | *ww.phd-ed]..rcation.cor.sg

d
 4. The chart below shows the adaptations that some birds have. r_-
Birds
F
(o
N
Chicken Eagle Peacock Penguin

Has small Has sharp Has colourful Has blowholes

pointed beak claws feathers

Which bird does not use the adaptation mentioned?

(1) Chicken
tZ) Eagle
(3) Peacock
(41 Penguin

5. It was a windy day. Two shorea fruits, A and B, are dropped from the same height as shown in
the diagram below.

A B

The time taken by each fruit to reach the ground was recorded. Which one is most likely to be
the correct set of records?

A B

(1) 3.3 s 4.6 s

(2) 4.6 s 4.6 s

(3) 4.6 s 3.3 s

(4) 4.6 s 10.2 s

6. The shorea is small, light and possesses wing-like structures. It is dispersed by

(7l wind
(2 ) water
3 l animals
4) explosive action

hD Educalic'r I www.pno eo -cation.com. sg

d-;
-_--------
7. Which of the following are adaptations that help plants to reduce water loss in a desert?
N A. Clasping roots
C'T
@ B. No flowers
C. Needle-like leaves
D. Waxy stems
(11 A and B only
t2) B and C only
t3) C and D only
t4l B,CandD

B. The following table shows how four animals are adapted for breathing in water.

Adaptations for breathing in water Animals

A Skin Tubifex worms
B Breathing tube Water spider
C Blowholes Dolphin
D Gills Tadpole

Which one is incorrect?

(11 A
{z) B
t3) C
(4) D

9. Birds have different types ofbeaks to help them survive in the environment. Their beaks act
like tools and obiects, with specific designs and functions. Study the table carefully.

Type Obiects representing the types ofbeaks Example of bird

A Sieve Pelican

B Nutcracker Eagle

C Chopsticks Heron
D Drinking straw Humming bird
E Satay stick Parrot

Which of the following best represent the respective birds?

ti) A and B only

(2) B and Eonly
t3l C, D and E only
(4) A, C and D only

PhD EdLr.:i:o. I www-phd-educatir:.:.cc

10. Which of the following are structural adaptations of animals? E-

A.
g)
B.
Bears hibernate during winter. (o
C.
Penguins huddle together to keep warm.
The stripes on tigers make it difficult for prey to detect them. N
D. The non-poisonous king snakes have similar bands on their bodies as the poisonous
coral snakes.

t1l A and B only

(2) C and D only
t3) A,BandConly
(4) A,B,CandD

11. The diagram below shows some fruits being matched to their method ofdispersal

Method of Dispersal Fruit

o
African Tulip

In which ofthe following group(s) can the African Tulip fruit be classified under?
(11 W only
(z) W and Y only
(3) X and Z only
t4) Y and Z only

d PhD aar.alion I www. phC'e i:c:1ion.com.sg

 12. How are penguins adapted to stay underwater for a long period of time?
N A. They have flippers.
{
o B.
C.
They have webbed feet.
Their feathers are thick.
D. Their muscles are able to store large amounts of oxygen.

t1) A only
(2) D only
(3) BandDonly
(4) A, B and C only

13. Below is the cross-section ofa pond. The locations of which Organisms X and Y are found at the
same spot over 48 hours are indicated.

Iust below the water surface

At the bottom ofthe pond

Y

\ /hich ofthe following best represents how Organisms X and Y are adapted to breathe in the
water?

x Y
(11 Carry an air bubble Skin
(2) Breathing tube Carrv an air bubble

t3) Gills Breathing tube

(41 Breathing tube Gills

PhD Ed!ca:ion I www.phd-educaaion.com.sg

Study the experiment and answer questions 14 and 15 r--
F{
50 g of leaves was taken from each of four different plants and labelled as A, B, C and D. They were N
then placed in separate plates under a warm lamp. The leaves were weighed again 12 hours later
and the results were recorded as shown below.
N
Type ofplant A B C D

Weight of leaves at first/ g 50 50 50 50

Weight ofleaves at the end/ g 36 ZO 46 13

14. \,Vhat was the aim of the experiment?

t1) To find out ifthe plants need light to survive.

(2) To find out if water is lost when the leaves photosynthesize.
(3) To find out which plant can survive in warm temperatures for a long time.
{4) To find out which plant witl absorb the most amount of light within the same amount of
time.

15. Which one ofthe above plants is most likely to be a cactus?

(11 A
(2) B
i3l C
(4) D

16. The diagram below shows a plant and its leaf.

The plant where this leaf is from will not survive in a desert as it has
1l green leaves that photosynthesize
2) large leaves that lose water easily
3) leaves with net vein patterns, which retain water
4) waxy leaves that make the water flow offthem

d ) ',i [o-uation I www pl"r-]-r c. c l'iJ'r.:.rfl.,9

 grams below show the different types ofbeaks and feet that birds have to help them
N survive in different environments.
{
N
4[

A B c

DEF
Which one of the following beaks and feet belongs to a bird that can swim in water and feed on
fish?
Beak Foot

t1) A D

(2) B F

(31 C F

t4l A E

18. The diagrams below show the beaks ofthree birds, J, K and L, and their feet W, X and Y.

tF Bird l
<a

Bird K Bird L

Feet W Feet X Feet Y

Match the birds to their correct feet.

Bird J Bird K Bird L

(11 x Y

(z) x
t3l x
(41 Y x

PID Edlcat:on I www.phd-ed:.ication.com.sg

19. The diagram below shows the feet ofa bird
r
tYt
F
N
Which one of the following statements is true of the bird?
(11 lt is a bird that flies.
(2) [t is able to move in water.
(31 [t digs in the ground for worms.
(41 [t perches on the branches oftrees.

20. Some inventions imitate the adaptations of animals. The diagram below shows a man in
snorkelling gears and flippers under water.

From which animals did Man get the idea of snorkelling gears and flippers?
A. Frog
B. Great diving beetle
C. Water stick insect
D. Tadpole
(11 AandC
(2) A and D
(3) BandC
(4) BandD

PhD ldrcation I www.phC-e d:;cation.cor.).:8

- A test is conducted to find out how the wingJike structure of an angsana fouit affects the time it
-TZt.
lY takes to reach the ground when dropped from a certain height. Three similar angsana fruits are
! selected and the wing-like structure ofthe ftuits is cut to various sizes. Subsequently, the time
S taken for each fruit to reach the ground when dropped from a certain height is recorded in the
table below.

Time taken for the angsana fruit to reach the ground/ s

Fruit
1"tTry zNd Try 3.d Try
6.9 6.4 6.0

x 2.4 2.4 2.6

Y 4.3 4.6 5.1

Which ofthe following correctly represents the angsana fruits W, X and Y?

wxy
(11

(2)

t3l

(4)

PhD Education I www. phd-aducation.com.sg

22. The table below shows the characteristics of four seeds or fruits, W, X, Y and Z.
t,)
Seed /Fruit Size Weight Other Characteristics N
W Small Light It has hooks.
N
x Small Light It is brightly coloured.
Y Small Light It has a dry and hard fruit wall when ripe.
7. Big Heavy lt has a fibrous husk.

What method of dispersal do W, X, Y and Z most likely use?

w x Y Z
(1) By wind By animals By water By animals
By splitting open
(2) By animals By animals By water
of fruit
(31 By animals By wind By wind By water
By splitting open By splitting open
(4) By water By wind
of fruit offruit

Ed ucal io'r lwww.phd-educalior com.sg

 3. Diagram 1 shows some plants (X, Y and ZJ planted on a plot of land along a river. The arrows
N show the direction ofthe water flow in the river. After several years, dispersal takes place and
-z{ more plants ofthe same kinds are seen growing in other areas as shown in Diagram 2.
o)
xxx
YY xx
River

/a-
ZZ
Diagram 1

xxx
YYY xx
YYY YY
xx xx
YYYYY River

/<t
xx
XXX ZZZ xx
XX ZZZZZ
zzz Diagram 2

Which one of the following sets of plants are X, Y and Z likely to be?

x Y Z
(11 Mangrove Balsam Lotus
(z) Lalang Angsana Love grass

(31 Pong pong Mango Coconut

(41 Shorea Saga Mimosa

PhD Education I www.phd-educatien..om.sg

d
24. A, B, C, D and E represent different animals
--
F
Adaptations of animals N
N
No Able to blend into its No
Streamlined body shape A
surroundings
Yes Yes
No
Can swim C B

Yes
No
Have gills E

Yes

Which of the following animals best represent A, B, C, D and E?

A B C D E

t1l Ostrich Polar bear Eagle Guppv Dolphin

(2) Pelican Grasshopper Bat Whale Seal

t3) Penguin Crocodile Camel Shark Frog

(4) Hawk Owl Kangaroo Crab Walrus

PhD I c -cation I www.phd cd -calion.com.sg

-*_-_--r
Question 25
N The table below shows how two plants adapt themselves.
{
00 [aJ Complete the table by writing the correct answers in boxes X and Y. (2 mJ
The adaptation helps
Plant Feature/characteristics
the organism to
Water hvacinth Spongy leaffilled with air x
Money plant Y Climb a support

[b] Why does the money plant need to climb a support? (1 m)

Question 26
An ostrich has wings but it cannot fly.
(a) What are the two possible reasons an ostrich cannot fly? [2 m)
ti)
(iD

(bJ How can an ostrich escape from its enemies? (1 m)

Question 27
The diagrams show four fishes

C+,< G#\c<
ABC D

(a) Put the fishes into two groups by writing A, B, C and D in the boxes. (2 mJ

Group X Group Y

(b) Why have the fishes been classified this way? [1 ml

PhD Educaticr'r I www.phd-eCacaaion.com.sg

 I-
Question 28
o)
Study the flowchart below. A, B, C, D, E and F represent different groups of animals.
l\
Adaptations of animals
N
No Able to blend into its No
Streamlined body shape A
surroundings
Yes Yes
No
Can swim C B

Yes

No Store large quantities of No

Have gills F
oxygen in the blood
Yes Yes

D E

[a] Give an example of an animal in Group E. [1 m)

(bJ List all the characteristics of animals in Group B. [1 m)

(c) Animal X has hollow bones. In which group does Animal X most likely belong to? (1 mJ

Question 29
Study the diagrams ofthe beaks and feet of two different birds, P and Q as shown below carefully.

t-!ur
\\\
\\ {ffi A4r-
,za

PQ
@
(aJ Give a difference between the functions ofthe beaks ofBirds P and Q. (1 mJ

(bJ Explain how the feet of Birds P and Q would help them to survive in their environment. (1 mJ

d PhD.:c-uation I www.phd ec -"arion.com.sg

 ^
;
Question 30
-. N
sc) An experiment was set up as shown in the diagram below. A young plant with twining stem was
placed in a pot ofsoil. A water dispenser was placed in the pot that will dispense water into the soil
at regular intervals. A wooden stick was also added in the pot. The pot was t}ren placed into an
opaque box tlat has a hole at one side and the box was left in the garden.

At the start of tle experiment

Opaque box
a
Water dispenser Wooden stick
Hole a
Plant

Pot ofsoil

[a) Why was a wooden stick placed in the pot? (1 mJ

At the end of 5 weeks

a
Opaque box

Water dispenser Wooden stick

Hole
Plant

Pot ofsoil

(b) After 5 weeks, the box was opened and it was found that the plant was in the position as shown
in the diagram above. Give an explanation for this observation at the end ofthe experiment.
(1 m)

1
PaD Educaaion I www.phd-ed:.:caaion.com-sg
Question 31 --F{
Study the pictures ofthe nymph ofthe damselfly and dragonfly below
¤
N

Damselfly nymph Dragonfly nymph

Which nymph can move through water more easily? Explain your answer. [1 mJ

Question 32

A B C D

(a) The diagrams above show the feet of a group of animals. Which group of animals do they belong
to? [1 mJ

(b) The diagram below shows the foot of Animal X. Which one of the above feet, A, B, C or D,
belongs to an animal that can move in the same way as Animal X? (1 m)

(c) Which part ofthe feet enables both animals (X and the animal you have named in part [b)J to
move in this way? [1 m]

lhD Educatior I www. phd-education.com.sg

___________-^
()ltestton 5J

B ,r**r-s below show the fruits of three different plants

l\) FruitA Fruit B Fruit C

.-
4 4 t
r'. I i' 4
4
4
N
4
t'.
4 4
Hooks Wing-like structure Seed

[a) State how the seeds are dispersed. [3 mJ

Fruit A:
Fruit B:
Fruit C:

(b) The dispersal patterns P and Q ofthe seeds are shown below
P a

'+i.:
.H: ..

<_ 10 m -----------+ + 5m _________+

Complete the table below to show which dispersal pattern relates to the seeds of Fruits B and C
above and give a reason for each answer. [2 mJ

Seeds of fruit Dispersal Pattern Reason

^
C

PhD Edu.aa:on I www.phd-ed:.:caa;rn.com.sg

Question 34
Blowhole
ft
00
N

Shark Dolphin

[a) Mark 'X' on all the parts of the shark's body that help it to keep balance and move forward.
(1 mJ

[b) In the diagram above, the nostril ofthe dolphin fblowholeJ is located at the top ofits head
What is the advantage ofhaving the nostril at this position? [2 m]

Question 35
Birds which wade in water must have adaptations to survive in that kind of environment. They
must have the adaptations to wade in the water and to pick food off the water with their beaks.
Study the three diagrams below ofwading birds.

Diagram 1 Diagram 2 Diagram 3

(aJ Which diagram shows birds which are best suited to live in such an environment? (1 ml

(bJ Give reasons why the birds in Diagram 3 are not suited to live in that kind ofenvironment.
(2 -J

:hD Educaticn I www. phd-ed ucation.com.sg

"_""_'_____-
Question 36
N An experiment was conducted as shown below with a wind-dispersed seed. The wind-dispersed
@
F seed was dropped from various heights in front ofa fan and the horizontal distance travelled by the
seed was measured by a measuring tape placed on a table.

+ ef- Height at which seed was dropped

+
+ ;L- Seed carried by the wind

+
Wind from the fan

+ Ruler

+ )-- Seed lands

Measuring tape (placed flat)

Height at which seed Horizontal distance travelled bv seed/ cm

was dropped/ cm 1"t Reading 2d Readins 3'd Readins
5 7 72 11
10 24 19 77
15 27 29 34
20 47 43 36
25 49 54 47
(a) What pattern can be observed from this experiment? [1 mJ

[bJ Why was the experiment repeated thrice? (1 m] i

Question 37
The following diagrams show two fishes X and Y. Fish Y is a natural predator of Fish X.

Fish X Fish Y

[a) State one physical adaptation that prevents Fish X from escaping from Fish Y. (1 mJ

[b] Explain the answer in part (a). (2 m)

PhD Edu.aaion I www.phd-e drcation.cor}r.sg

d
 I-
Question 3B
Shane wanted to find out how the wing-like structure ofa seed affects the distance it will travel in
l.a
oo
wind. He cut the length of the wing of Seed H. He dropped it down from a height of 1 m and
measured the horizontal distance it travelled as shown in the set-up below.
N
Point where the seed is dropped
x

Length ofthe
Fan
wing-like
structure Seed H 1m

Horizontal distance

Based on the result, the following graph was plotted

Horizontal distance travelled/ cm

Se edG
t20

100 s H

80

60

40
/,/
20

0 1ZJ 4
Length of wingJike structure/ cm

[aJ What is the relationship between the length ofthe wing-like structure ofSeed H and the
horizontal distance travelled? (1 m)

(b) Using the graph, predict the horizontal distance travelled by Seed H when its wing-like
structure is less than 1 cm. [1 m)

(c) Shane repeated the experiment with Seed G and Seed lwhich are obtained from the same plant
as Seed H. Seed G was lighter than Seed H and Seed I was the heaviest among the three seeds.
The result for Seed G was plotted in the graph above. Plot the result for Seed J on the graph
above. (1 m)

d ahD :ducation I www. phd-education.com.:g

---------r
Theme: Interactions
N
@
C'l Man's Impact on His
1B
Environment
1. ln Country X, the number ofcows is being controlled to prevent cows from overgrazing the
grassland. Overgrazing will directly result in
(11 forest fire
(2) air pollution
t3l soil erosion
(41 new vegetation

2. Which ofthe following are the results ofthe increase in the amount ofcarbon dioxide in the
atmosphere?
A. Acid rain
B. Soil erosion
C. Air pollution
D. Global warming

tll AandConly
(2) Aand Donly
t3) B, C and D only
(4) A, B, C and D

3. Lichens are organisms which are very sensitive to air pollution. The graph below shows how
the distance from a power station affects the number ofB/pes oflichen growing around the
power station.

Number of different types of lichen growing

Distance from power station/ km

Which one ofthe following conclusions can be drawn from the graph above?
(1) There are fewer types of lichens growing near the power station.
(2) Less types oflichens grow in areas further away from the power station.
t3) As the distance from the power station increases, air pollution increases.
t4l The number oftypes oflichens growing decreases when the distance from the power
station increases.

PhD Educatior: { www.phd-educaai...com.sg

4. Three beakers were filled with water taken from different parts of a river. Ten similar fish and
I-

the same amount ofhydrilla were then placed into each beaker. It was ensured that the same N
amount of food was given at the same time daily and that the three beakers were placed at the 6
same place. The number of fish left at the end of 20 days was recorded in the table below. N
Water source Number offish left after 20 days
Part A ofthe river 10

Part B of the river 6

Part C ofthe river 4

Why was the number of surviving fish different for different parts ofthe river?
(7 They did not have enough food.
(2 They did not have enough oxygen.
( Some parts ofthe river were polluted.
(4 Some fish were eaten up by other fish

5. Which of the following operate by using a renewable source of energy?

A. Windmill
B. Solar heater
C. Kerosene lamp
D. Hydroelectric power station
(11 A and B only
(2) B and C only
t3) A,BandDonly
t4) A,B,CandD

6. Which one ofthe following groups shows examples of renewable sources of energy only?
(1) Petrol, steam and air
(2) Wind, waterfall and sun
(31 Kerosene, cooking oil and sun
(4) Rice, kerosene and waterfall

7. A test was carried out to determine the pollution level of five different locations along the road.
A layer ofoil is smeared on five pieces ofglass slides and they were placed at the five different
locations along the road. After a period of time, the slides were collected and the amount ofdust
particles trapped was checked. To ensure a fair test, which ofthe following variables must be
kept the same?
A. Size of glass slides
B. Amount of oil used
C. Duration of experiment
D. Location where slides are placed
(1) A and B only
(z) C and D only
(31 A,BandConly
(41 A,B,CandD

d .nD Lduc;rli: r I www.phd rc-Lation.cor'-r.-<l

 ^

."""""""""".8
Vvhich ofthe following are renewable sources ofenergy? ^
N A. Sun
@
o B.
C.
Wind
Coal
D. Moving water
(1) A and B only
(2) C and D only
(31 A,BandDonly
t4l B,CandDonly

9. Which one of the following consists of renewable energy sources only? ^.

t1) Solar, natural gas, wood
(2) Wind, geothermal, coal
t3l Oil, natural gas, nuclear
(41 Wind, geothermal, solar

10. Which one of the following human activities has a negative impact on the environment?
t1) Recycling
(2) Reforestation
(3) Usage of chlorofluorocarbon (CFC) products
(41 Developingenergz-efficienttechnology

11. \tVhich of the following are effects of global warming?

A. Earthquakes
B. Melting ofglaciers
C. Increase in food prices
D. Prolonged flooding
:
t1l AandBonly
(2) BandConly
t3l B, C and D only
(41 A, C and D only

^.
.'

PhD Edu.3a:on I www. phd-education.co.n.sg

12. The diagram below shows some human activities which affect the environment.
--
o)
6
6 Town
e Reforestation
N
A

Sewage outflow s ,/-^

F
I
ffiss Saw mills
B

Pulp factory
Vehicle carrying
paper products C
River
E
D

Based on the diagram, what are the activities that cause air pollution?
(11 A and B only
(2) A,DandFonly
i3l B,CandDonly
(4) B,CandEonly

13. An oil spill from a tanker covered a large area ofwater near the seashore. The organisms living
in that area were badly affected. Which ofthe following statements is/are true about how some
seabirds were badly affected?
A. They drank the water that was contaminated by the oil.
B. They ate the fish which had swallowed the oil and were poisoned.
C. Their feathers were soaked with oil and they could not fly.
D. Their feathers were stuck together by the oil and they could not keep themselves warm.

ill A only
(2) only
B and D
t3l B,CandDonly
t4l A,B,CandD

14. What are the benefits brought about by the development in science and technology as a result
of Man's interaction with the environment?
A. The Earth becomes warmer due to the increasing greenhouse effect.
B. We can communicate with people over long distances quickly and clearly.
C. We have man-made materials such as alloys and plastics to meet our needs.
D. We have food of better quality.

t1) A and only

C
(2) only
B and D
(31 B,CandDonly
(4) A,B,CandD

d DhD Fd..,:aii: r I www.phd-ed-calio'r .ar .8

 15. Which one of the following activities does not cause global warming?
N
(o t1l High usage oftransport vehicles on land
o (2)
(3)
Dumping of sewage into the river
Burning ofold crops by farmers
(4) Clearing oflarge areas offorests to build residential areas

16. The graph shows the average temperature on Earth over a period of two decades
oC
Temperature/

Time/ years

Which ofthe following explain(s] the trend ofaverage temperature over the period?
A. Reducing the use ofplastics bags
B. Overfishing ofa certain species offish
C. Fumes released from factories and vehicles
D. Clearing ofvast areas of forests to make way for houses

(11 C only
(2) A and B only
t3l C and D only
t4l B,CandDonly

17. The following symbol is commonly seen on iuice bottles. It indicates that the plastic used to

t\}
make the bottle can be recycled.

}..2a
'r7
\,Vhich one ofthe following is not a reason to recycle plastics?
(1) Burning plastics releases greenhouse gases.
(z) Recycled plastics are less useful than new plastics.
(31 Recycling plastic uses less energy than producing plastics.
(4) Plastics take up space in landfills as most cannot be broken down by decomposers.

flD Education I www. phrl-ed:cation.com.sg

 I-
18. Reforestation is the planting oftrees on lands where there used to be forests. Which ofthe
following are most likely benefits resulting from reforestation? p{
CN
A. More soil would be eroded.
N
B. More oxygen would be released into the air.
C. More carbon dioxide would be absorbed ftom the air.
D. More food and shelter would be available for animals.

(1) A and C only

(2) B and C only
(3) A,BandDonly
(4) B,CandDonly

?hD Education I www. phd-educa:ion.{3m.sg

N
ro lmpurities A, B, C, D, E and F are contaminants that may be found in the water. The table below
N shows the types of impurities that Filters V, W, X, Y and Z can filter water to make it safe for human
consumption. Each filter costs $ 10 000.

Filter Impurities
V AandE
AandB
x AandF
Y DandE
Z CandE

[aJ Water Treatment Plant P treats water from a river that contains Impurities A, B, C and D. Which
are the filters that Water Treatment Plant P must have in order to filter the water from the river
safe enough for human consumption without incurring unnecessary cost? (1 m]

[b) Water Treatment Plant Q has Filters V, W, X and Z. It treats water that contains Impurities A, B,
C, E and F. One ofthe filters is damaged. Fortunately, Water Treatment Plant Q is still able to
remove all the impurities from the water. \{hich of the Filters V, W, X or Z is damaged? (1 m)

Ouestion 20

A
River
lungle

B f)am

ftft
6ft
Village ,fu

The diagram above shows a river flowing between a village and a iungle. When a dam is built across
the river at AB, the flow of the river water is blocked.
(a) Give one negative impact of building the dam on the environment. (1 m)

(bJ Give one advantage of building the dam. (1 ml

PhD fd!.ation I www. pl-:d-cd ucation.co.i.sg

 Question 21
r
The concentration ofdissolved oxygen, the number ofbacteria and the number offish in a river
m
(Il
were studied. Along the river, a factory which dumped sewage waste was situated a distance
downstream from Point X-
N
Point X Downstream
a
River

Factory

The measurements over a distance of50 km were taken from Point X. The results were represented
in a graph as shown below.

't Concentration of
dissolved oxygen

Number offish

- Number of bacteria

x 510 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Distance downstream /km
(a) At what distance from Point X did the river become polluted? Explain your answer. [2 m)

(bJ Based on the graph above, describe the negative effects of polluting the river with sewage.
(3 -)

:ducation I ruwr,v.llrd-ed;ca:ia:r.com.sg
d-ilt
 !X n f".r". found that his crops were affected by a certain pest. He then started to spray pesticides to
-Questionzz
.F Protect nrs crops'
[a) Give a reason why the spraying of pesticides is not a good solution. (1 m)

[bJ The farmer's problem can be solved using biotechnology. What is the characteristic that the
crops can be genetically modified so that they will not be destroyed? (1 m]

Question 23
A small amount ofwater from three rivers, A, B and C, was collected and tested for Chemical Z.
Chemical Z is a poisonous chemical that is harmful to living things. The results for the tests are
shown in the graph below.
Amount ofChemical Z

River
RiverA River B River C

[a] Based on the results given, plot a bar graph that predicts the number of living things in the
three different rivers. Label your graph clearly. [4 mJ

River A River B River C

(b) What is the relationship between the amount of Chemical Z and the number of living things in
the river? (1 m)

PhD Educatiol': I www.phd-educalion.cor-l.sg

 I-
Question 24
The development in science and technology has brought about some negative impacts on the
tt
o)
environment, such as global warming and air pollution.
does deforestation lead to global warming? [1 mJ
N
[a] How

[b] How does air pollution cause acid rain? Name one effect of acid rain. (2 ml

Question 25
Samuel wanted to find out ifSubstance Q, a substance commonly disposed ofby factories into
rivers, affects Organisms A, B and C. He prepared ten beakers, each containing 500 ml ofclean river
water and the same number of Organisms A, B and C. He added different amounts of Substance Q to
each ofthe ten beakers. After a day, he counted the number ofeach Brpe oforganism still alive in
the beakers. The graph below shows his results.
Number oforganisms

Amount of Substance Q/ g

faj Which organism(sJ was/were affected by Substance Q? Explain your answer. [2 m]

(b) Samuel then took water samples from four points as numbered in the map below.

1, Discharge point

Factory X
2
Factory Y

3
Direction of river
flow as indicated F actory Z
by arrow
4

d !10 aducation I www.;hd-eriL:cation.com,sg

-_--_-_-I
He counted the number ofOrganisms, A, B and C, in each water sample and the results are
N shown in the table below.
ro 1 2 3 4
C') A Many Many Few None
B Many Many Many Many
C Many Many Many Few

Which Factory, Y or Z, gave out more of Substance Q? Provide a reason for your answer. (1 m)

Question 26
Different aquatic organisms can tolerate different amount ofpollutants. As the level of pollutants
increases, the number ofcertain organisms will decrease and the number ofother organisms will
increase. The graph shows the percentage ofthe different organisms at the various levels of
pollutants in a river. Equal amounts ofwater samples were collected from Points A and B ofthe
river.

Percentage of organisms
tZ

Y
x
Amount of pollutants

A River

Flow ofthe river B

The percentage ofeach organism found in water samples collected is shown in the table below.

x Y z
Point A 45o/o 2Oo/o 10o/o

Point B 0o/o 7Oo/o 50o/o

(aJ Using the table above, compare the amount of pollutants from Point A to B. [1 mJ

(bJ Describe one human activity that could have caused this change in the level of pollution? [1 m)

PhD E.ru..alon { www.phd-ed:-.::aaion.com.sg

 Question 27
Complete the flowchart below by filling in the blanks labelled [a] to [d). [2 m]
N
- o)
Negative impact of Man's activities on his environment N
CFCs from spray cans Ic] from burning fuels

leads to leads to

Holes in the fal _ layer I ncreased greenhouse effect

results in entry of results in

(b) rays (dl

mav cause may cause

Skin cancer lce caps to melt and sea levels to rise

Question 28
Millions oftonnes ofrubbish are being disposed in landfill sites annually. Much ofthis waste comes
from plastic which takes a long time to disintegrate. A group of researchers have invented a
machine which can process the toxic gas produced from melting plastic. The toxic gas can be
further processed to become kerosene, diesel and petrol.
(aJ What effect will this machine have on the limited natural resources available? [1 mJ

(b) Suggest two other benefits to the environment if this invention was widely put into use. (2 m)

d* D Educalio.r I www.phd-education.tcm.sg
 S ff,".frr* Uelow shows what happens to the refuse that is taken to the incineration plant.
-ouestiol2g
erN
Refuse bunker
Trucks empty refuse into bunker Generator
Boiler
Steam spins generator
Heat from the burning
to produce electricity
of refuse changes
for use in incinerator
Incinerator water into steam
and home
Refuse is burnt in incinerator

Magnet
Iron is removed from the ashes
Iron Bunker
Trucks take away iron
to iron mill
Ash Bunker
Trucks take ashes to landfill

OUT

Explain how two practices carried out at the above incineration plant support the conservation of
natural resources. [2 m)
(al
tbl

PhD Educat:on I www.phd-educatisn..om.sg

d
 I-
Question 30
CN
The diagram below shows part ofa river and the direction ofwater flow
or
N
A

Land

Land

River

Paul collected several water samples ofthe same volume from Areas A and B ofthe river. The water
samples were analysed and the number of Organisms X, Y and Z found in the water samples are
recorded in the tahle below.

Population of organisms in water samples

Area
Other
Organism X Organism Y Organism Z
organisms

A 41 15 t9

B 56 19 46 29

[aJ A sewage discharge pipe can be found at both Areas A and B. It is known that more sewage,
containing animal waste, was discharged into the river at Area B than at Area A. What is the
relationship between the amount ofsewage discharged and the population of Organisms X and
Z based on the information provided in the table above? [1 mJ

[b) How is the amount of dissolved oxygen in the river likely to be as a result of the greater amount
of sewage at Area B? Explain clearly how this is caused by the presence ofsewage. (2 ml

d PhD aducation I www. phd-ed ucalion.tcr..sg

___________-^
uuestlon J1
$ ,n" map of an area is shown in the diagram below. The factory started discharging contaminants
X into the river when it started operations one week ago. A group of researchers was tasked to
Y conduct a survey on the extent ofpollution caused by the factory.

^6ro
ffiH,
Village Farm

3
2

Kev
Factory <- Direction of water flow
1

[a) At which tlvo locations on the map should they collect water samples? [1 m]

(b) The researchers proposed the construction ofa treatment plant along the river to reduce the
extent ofpollution caused by the factory.

[i) Suggest a suitable location for the treatment plant. Indicate this by putting a 'x' in the
diagram above. [1 m)

(ii) Give a reason for your choice. (1 m]

PlrD Education I www.phd-ed:..rcaai3n.com-sg

 Theme: Energy E-
FI
(,
L9 Light and Shadows (n

1. A stick is placed in the middle of a board as shown in the diagram below.

A B

stick

Shadows
C

Which ofthe bulbs have to be switched on simultaneously such that the shadows ofthe stick
are formed as shown in the diagram?
1) A and B only
A and C only
3) B and C only
4) B and D only

2. Study the diagram shown below

Lamp

Peter

Mirror
Bouncing tennis ball

i!
o'

Looking into the mirror, Peter can see a tennis ball bouncing towards him. Which one ofthe
following identifies the path of light that makes it possible for Peter to see the tennis ball in the
mirror?
i1l Lamp --.l Bouncing tennis ball -+ Peter
(2) Peter J Mirror -+ Bouncing tennis ball
(3] Lamp --.l Bouncing tennis ball -, Mirror J Peter
(41 Peter r Mirror -, Bouncing tennis ball -, Lamp

tducali rr I wnw.phd-eouuatiol.ccr .8

d-;;i
."-3 Mark wanted to test if light travels only in a straight line. He has three set-ups, P, Q and as
w
S,

o
N
shown below. He looked through the holes from X as shown by the arrows.
x
x
o
3cm wide hole

White wooden block

I
Set-up P Set-up Q

3 cm wide hlack hollow ruhber hose

<-x
Set-up S

Which ofthe set-ups would he not be able to see the light from the candle?
t1l P only
(2) Q only
(3) Q and S only
(4) P and S only

4. Which one of the following shadows can be formed by the obiect below?

I
I EI B
I
I C
FI
D

t1l A and B only

(2) B and C only
t3l A,BandDonly
(4) A,B,CandD

PaD Education I www. phri-:ducation.cor..s:l

d
5. In the diagram below, an object is placed between the torch and the screen
(v)
- o
fn
Torch
Object
Screen

The object is made up of different materials as shown below.

Metal Kev
Clear plastic sheet
I Dark shadow
Cardboard
Tracing paper B Lighter shadow

No shadow

Which one of the following is most likely to be the shadow formed on the screen?

t1l t2)

(3) t4l

6. The diagram below shows a torchlight shining at an obiect.

Torch
Obiect
Screen

Which one ofthe following objects would cast the darkest shadow when a torchlight is shone at
it?
(1) Glass beaker
(2) Frosted glass
(3) Tracing paper
(4) Five-cent coin

onD Education | *ww.phd-eourcatio.l.cor.qg

---__--r
7. lessica wanted to create a shadow on a white screen using the set-up below.
(l)
o
s G''

Torch
Transparent container
filled with a substance Screen

To form a shadow on the screen, which ofthe following conditions are required?
A. A light source must be present.
B. The container must be placed upright.
C. The substance in the container must be a solid.
D. The substance must not allow all light to pass through it.

t1l A and D
(2) A, B and D
(3) A, C and D
(41 A, B, C and D

8. The diagram below shows a boy sitting under the shade of a tree

Which one of the following statements is incorrect?

t1) The tree blocks the light rays and creates a shadow.
(2) The shadow will not always be at the opposite side ofthe sun as the sun moves.
t3l The shadow will change in size depending on the position ofthe sun.
(41 The boy's shadow will be blocked by the tree's shadow.

PhD Education I www.phd-edr:caaion.com.sg

 9. Which of the following would result in a bigger shadow to be cast on the screen? --
rn
E'
o
(Y1
Torch
0bject
Screen

A Move the screen nearer to the object.

B Move the screen away from the obiect.
C Move the light source nearer to the object.
D Move the light source away from the object.
(1) A and C only
t2) A and D only
(31 B and C only
(4) B and D only

10. Study the set-up shown in the diagram below.

\n / Light source
-(D
A
B
c Black screen

Mirror

Which pair ofarrows shows the correct reflection oflight by the mirror?

i1l A and C only

(z) B and C only
(31 A and D only
(41 B and D only

11. The diagram below shows a torch shining on two wooden blocks

Screen

Torch
Wooden blocks

Which one of the following will be the shadow formed on the screen?

t1l Q) (3) t4)

d';
hD education I www.plC-eCucation.com.sg
-- ?tZ. An experiment was conducted to find out how the position of the obiect affected the image in a
t{ pinhole camera. A tiny hole was made in the middle of one side of the box and a screen was
e placed at the opposite end ofthe box. When the obiect was placed at Point X, the image was
Cn formed on the screen as shown in the diagram below.

Pinhole Screen

Object

Point X
/
Image
Pinhole camera

When the object was placed at Point Y, the image was formed as shown below
Screen
Pinhole

Point Z
Obiect
,2Point,2X PointY
Pinhole camera
7,
Image

When the obiect was placed at Point Z, which of the following would likely be observed about
the image formed on the screen?
A. The image would be upright.
B. The image would be inverted.
C. The image would be bigger than the object.
D. The image would be smaller than the obiect.

t1l A and B only

(2) AandConly
(3) BandConly
(4) BandDonly

PtrD Educaaion I www. phd-education.com.sg

 13. Sam cycled along a road at night and passed by a lamp post as shown in the diagram below. --
N
/t \\
o
ft1

ABC
Which one ofthe following graphs shows correctly the changes in the length of Sam's shadow
as he cycles from Point B to Point C over a period of time?

(1) Length ofshadow (2) Length ofshadow

Time Time

(3] Length ofshadow (4) Length ofshadow

Time Time

Education I www.phd-education.t.L.sg

dilt
 ob iect A is placed in front of a torch to cast a shadow on the screen as shown in the diagram
(l)
o
-14.
@
below.
Screen

E'
Obiect A
Torch

PQR S

When Object A is at P, the size ofthe shadow cast on the screen is 15 cm. Which one ofthe
following correctly shows the size ofthe shadow cast on the screen when Object A is placed at
QRandS?
Size of shadow/ cm

a R s

t1l 11 13 15

(2) 17 15 13

t3l 73 71 9

t4l 17 19 27

15. An experiment was set up as shown in the diagram below.

Screen

Torch Object
Cardboard

What can be done to make the shadow on the screen smaller?

A. Move the torch and cardboard nearer to the object.
B. Move the obiect nearer to the screen.
C. Move the screen towards the object.
D. Move the screen away from the obiect.

tll B only
(2) AandDonly
(3) BandConly
(4) Au B and D only

PhD tducation I www.phd-educaai.n..om.sg

16. A factory wants to make reflective strips to be pasted on bicycles so that it will be safer for --
o)
cyclists to travel at night. The factory conducted a test to find out which is the most suitable
material to make the reflective strips. A graph ofthe results ofthe experiment is as shown
below.
o
(Y1

Amount of light reflected

-----A
B

C
D
Distance/ m

Which material should the factory choose for making the reflective strip?
(1) A
(2) B
t3)
(41
c
D

PhD {:,J-cation I www.ph,J cd-calion.com.sg

 n17
w
ts The diagram below shows the shapes ofthe shadows produced when two different objects were
o placed between a screen and a torch. The dimensions ofthe objects are shown in the box on the
right.

Shadows formed on screen

/\1,.-
<------>
2cm

2cm

2cm

2cm
Torch

ofthe screen
A hole was made in the centre of the square obiect and it was then placed in front
together with the triangular obiect as shown below. Draw the shadow produced on the screen
when the torch is switched on.

Hole

Torch

PhD Educa:lon I www.phd-ed::cation.com.sg

Question 1B --F{
A ball is placed between a torchlight and a screen. A shadow is observed on the screen.
F{
Screen
(n

E
Torch
Ball

(a) It is noticed that the shadow is very light. State one possible reason for this observation. (1 m]

(b) What can be done to increase the size ofthe shadow? [1 m]

Ouestion 19
A kite is placed in front ofa screen and a light source is behind the kite as shown in the diagram
below. The aim ofthe experiment is to find out ifthe position ofthe kite affects the size ofthe
shadow.

Kite

,/ Distance between Distance between

Screen
light and kite kite and screen
Torch

Distance between light source and screen

The results are tabulated below

Distance between light Distance between kite Size of shadow
source and screen/ cm and screen/ cm flensthwise)/ cm
100 20 10

100 40 20

100 60 30

100 BO 40

What is the relationship between the distance between the torchlight and the kite to the size ofthe
shadow (lengthwisel? (1 mJ

d PhD Fd....,r o r i www.phd-edu'aliu'r.com.,g

-------r
Question 20
ul
H The diagram below shows an experiment in which a light sensor is used to determine the degree of
N transparency of different materials.

Light sensor
,/
Torch

Material tested

(aJ Describe the room where the experiment should be conducted to ensure a fair test. (1 ml

(b) Identiff two variables that must be kept consant [2 m)

PID Education I www.phd-education.corx.sg

 Theme: Energr r-*
fn
l.{
20 Heat and Temperature (Y)

1. Study the diagram below carefully.

Stopper

Bottle

The and causes the stopper to pop out.

(1) bottle expands upon heating
{2) bottle contracts upon heating
(3) air in the bottle expands upon heating
(41 air in the bottle contracts upon heating

2. An experiment was set up as shown in the diagram below. The water in all the set-ups had the
same initial temperature. The water in each beaker was heated to boiling point and the
temperature and the time taken for the water to boil were recorded.

200 ml ofwater 200 ml ofwater

Candles Candles

Set-up A Set-up B Set-up C

Which ofthe following statement(s] is/are true at the end ofthe experiment?
A. Set-up A would take the longest time to boil.
B. The water in Set-up C would have the highest amount ofheat energy.
C. The temperature in Set-up B would be higher than the temperature in Set-up A.
(11 A only
{2) A and C only
(3) B and C only
(4) A,BandC

d phD I rr .. aric r I www phC r.c-".rt,o].com.sg

__-3
The air in a large paper bag was heated as shown in the diagram below
w
H
5 Large paper bag

+
Heat

The bag rose through the surrounding air. What was the cause?

t1) Heat always rises.

t2) The air in the bag expanded and rose.
(31 The mass of the paper bag decreased.
(41 The mass ofthe air in the bag increased

4. A test was conducted to compare the amount of light and heat emitted by two bulbs, X and Y, of
the same voltage. Each bulb was tested in an electric circuit to measure the amount oflight and
heat given out. In both circuits, the same amount of electricity was supplied. The graph below
shows the amount oflight and heat emitted by Bulbs X and Y.
Amount of enerS/ emitted

xcv
E Lisht

W Heat

Bulb
XY
Based on the graph, which ofthe following deductions are definitely true about Bulbs X and Y?

A Bulb Y is able to last longer than Bulb X.

B Bulb X is able to conserve more energy than Bulb Y.
C Bulb Y is brighter than Bulb X when more electricity is supplied.
D Bulb Y is hotter than Bulb X when the same amount of electricity is supplied
(1) A and B only
(2) A and C only
(3) B and C only
(41 B and D only

PhD Edu.aa:on J www. phd-:ducation.con't.5g

5. Leon dropped five drops of wax at the corners of a pentagon metal frame as shown in the --LN
diagram below. The drops of wax were then left to cool and solidi4/.
FI
(n
Metal frame

Wax

Subsequently, he heated the frame with a bunsen burner at Position X. The drops ofwax melted
completely at different times. Which of the following shows the correct order of the melting
wax, starting from the one which melted first?

t1l D,C E,B, A

(z) D,E C, A, B
t3l C,D E,B, A
t4l D,C B, E, A

6. The table displays the time and temperature of pure water when it is heated. \iVhat is the
temperature of pure water at the 25th minute?

Time/ min Temperature/ "C

5 30

10 50

15 70

20 90
Z5 ')

t1l 90 "c
(2) 100.c
t3) 110 "C
(4) 720"C

PhD adtcation I www. pid-education.com.:g

 Walsh conducted two experiments as shown in the diagram below. The materials used are W, X,
w Y and Z.
-7F Screen
C'T

Electronic thermometer

Material Material

Set-up A Set-up B

He recorded his findings in the table and graph for Set-ups A and B respectively

Results from Set-up A

Material Image seen on the screen

w Very bright patch oflight
x Bright patch of light
Y Vague patch oflight
Z Dark patch

Results from Set-up B

Temperature/ 'C
z
Y
x

Time/ s

\{hat conclusion can he draw from the above data?

t1l All the materials are good conductors of heat.

(2) The more opaque a material is, the more heat it can absorb.
t3) Materials that are transparent are usually good conductors of heat.
t4l There is no relationship between the two sets ofdata.

pa:D Iducation I www. phd-ed::cation.con:.sg

B. An experiment is set up as shown in the diagram below
:\
Hot water
- r{
m
Rod X Wax
Rod Y

Rod Z

Rods X, Y and Z are ofthe same length but ofdifferent materials. Three pieces ofwax are placed
at the tip of each rod. It is observed that the wax on X melts first followed by that on Y and then
Z. Which one of the following statements explains the observation?

(1) Some materials give off heat more easily than others.
(z) Some materials conduct heat more easily than others.
(3) Some pieces of wax melt more easily than other pieces.
(4) Some parts ofthe water gain heat more easily than other parts.

9. Object X was placed on top of Object Y and heated over a candle flame
object X
Object Y

Candle

The diagrams below show the appearance of Obiect X and Ob!ect Y before and after heating.

object x Object x
Burnt

0bject Y Object Y

Top view of Object X and Top view ofobject x and

object Y before heating Object Y after heating

Which one ofthe following correctly shows the properties ofObiect x and Obiect Y?

Obiect X Obiect Y

t1l Good conductor ofheat Poor conductor of heat

(2) Good conductor ofheat Good conductor ofheat

(3) Poor conductor of heat Poor conductor of heat

(41 Poor conductor of heat Good conductor of heat

d PhD a{jrcation ! wwx.llC-education.cor.:3

 10. Samuel wanted to find out if colour or material has a greater impact on the amount ofheat an
w object can absorb. If he can only use three cups to conduct his experiment which ofthe
F following cups should he use?
@
Cups CoIour Material
A White lron
B Black Steel

C Black Iron
D White Copper

E Black Copper
F \ivhite Steel

tll A, D and E
(Z) A, D and F
(3) B, C and D
(4) B, C and E

11. The diagram below shows an electric oven.

M
L

Which one ofthe following correctly shows the materials the parts labelled K, L and M can be
made oP

K L M
(1) Plastic Glass Plastic
(2) Metal Glass Plastic
(3) Metal Plastic Plastic

t4l Plastic Plastic Metal

P1D lducation I www. phd-educaa:cn.com.sg

12. An experiment was set up on a hot day and observed hourly. After five hours, it was observed --
that the canvas bag ofsand had reached the oil. o)
..' lz ..t, r{
/l\
Copper wire
/l\
fn
Wooden pole

Cotton string
!
\ Canvas bag ofsand

oil

After 5 hours

What was the aim of the experiment?

(1) To find out whether the canvas bag would soak up the oil.
(2) To find out how long the wooden poles would stay upright.
t3l To find out whether the copper wire would expand in the heat of the day.
t4) To find out how much the cotton string would be stretched by the weight of the sand.

13. The experiment as shown in the diagram below was set up. 20 minutes later, the volume of
water that remained in the beaker was recorded.

Beaker ofwater

Candle

The experiment was repeated with two identical candles, then with three identical candles. The
results were recorded in the table below.

Volume of water/ ml
Number of candles
Before the experiment After the experiment
7 50 47

2 50 42

3 50 37

The aim olthe experiment was to find out if .

i1) the rate of evaporation is affected by the exposed surface area ofthe water
(2) the amount ofheat received by the beaker ofwater is affected by the duration of the
experiment
(3) the rate of evaporation is affected by the amount ofheat received by the beaker of
water
t4) the amount of heat received by the beaker of water is affected by the number of candles
used

d .hD fducation I rauww. phd-edrcalio.-.om,sg

 14. W,X,y a,r.d Z are four similar lumps of wax on a piece of copper wire that was bent into the
w shape of a regular star. When the copper wire was strongly heated at a certain point, the blobs
N
o of wax began to melt in the order of W, X, Z, Y.
D

A
7.

B
XY

At which point, A, B, C or D, was the wire most likely to be heated?

t1l A
(2) B
(31 C
(41 D

15. Three containers, K, L and M, were made ofdifferent materials. They were filled with equal
amount ofboiling water. The time taken for the water in each container to cool down was
plotted on the graph as shown below.
Temperature/ "C

100
Kcv
75 K -------
L
50
M
25

Time/ min
0 5 10 15 20

Based on the above graph, identii/ the possible material for each container

Container K Container L Container M

t1l Plastic lron Wood

(2) Wood Plastic lron
i3) Glass Styrofoam Aluminium
t4) Aluminium Glass Styrofoam

P,1D aducation I www.phd-educaaicn.com.sg

16. Two set-ups, K and L, were prepared for an experiment using four identical styrofoam cups r-
The apparatus at the start ofthe experiment is shown in the diagram below- F{
Thermometer Wooden rod Thermometer Aluminium rod
N
(n

Cup A with Cup B with Cup C with Cup D with

100 ml ofhot 50 ml of cold 50 ml ofhot 100 ml ofcold
oC
water at 90 "C water at 10 water at 90 'C water at l-0 "C

Set-up K Set-up L

The temperatures ofthe water in each ofthe four cups were recorded ten minutes after the
start of the experiment. Arrange the cups according to the temperature of the water in them,
from the coolest to the hottest.

Coolest ---------t Hottest

(11 D B C A

(z) A,C,D,B
(31 B,D,C,A

t4l D,C,B,A

17. Five pieces ofiron rods ofthe same size are joined together to form a structure. Four lumps of
wax are stuck to different parts ofthe structure as shown in the diagram below.

Wax Wax

At which point should the flame be placed so that all the lumps of wax will melt in the shortest
time?
t1) A
(z) B
i3) C

t4l D

d Phl) l.r.rcation I www. phd-education.com.sg

(x
N (a) The beaker shown in the diagram below contains some cold water
N Part A

o0 0 s
Part B o oo 0q ao Water droplets
o o
o0 0

Water at 5 "C

Why are water droplets formed on Part B of the beaker but not on Part A? (2 mJ

[bJ The two containers below contain the same amount ofwater at the same temperature. They are
placed on a table in a room.

Water at 5 "C

Iron container Plastic container

On which container will water droplets appear sooner on the outer side ofthe container? Give a
reason for your answer. [2 ml

Question 19
Four drops of wax are dropped at the four corners ofa square metal frame as shown in the diagram
below.

Wax A Wax B

Square metal frame

Wax D Wax C

When the square metal frame is heated with a bunsen burner, the drops of wax melted in the
following order: C, B, D, A. On the diagram, mark "X" on the spot where the metal frame is likely to
be heated. (1 mJ

PhD Edrca!:o. I www. phd-ed!.ation.com.ig

 Question 20
r--
(n
A sealed bottle of hot milk is immersed into a container ofcold water as shown in the diagram N
below. fn

Cold water at 20 "C

Hot milk at 80 "C

The temperature ofthe cold water was measured at regular intervals for 15 minutes and plotted in
the graph shown below.

Temperature/ "C

80

60

40

20
t
Time/ min
0 5 10 15

(a) What was the final temperature of the cold water during the 1s-minute period? (1 mJ

(bJ On the same axes, plot the graph to show the changes in the temperature of the hot milk for the
1S-minute period. [1 m)

[cJ Ifthe bottle was made ofa poorer conductor ofheat than before, how different would the rate
of temperature change in the hot milk be? [1 mJ

to-c,rt or lwww.ph I ,,ducation.com rg

dr;;'
 21
w Four pieces of similar sizes ofbutter were placed and sealed in four containers made ofdifferent
N materials shown in the diagram below.
-ouestion
F as

Material P Material Q Material R Material S

The graph below shows the time taken for the butter in each container to melt completely.
Time taken

x
x
x
x
Material
PQRS
(a) Based on the information given, which material is the most suitable for making a thermal flask?
Explain your answer. [2 m]

[b] How does the property mentioned in part [aJ help to keep the content warm? [1 m)
^
0uestion 22
The diagram shows the parts of an electric iron.

Wire Handle

Sole

[a] Suggest a material that is commonly used for the sole. Give a reason for your answer. [1 m)

(bJ Suggest a suitable material for the handle. Give a reason for your answer. (1 mJ

PhD Edu.:a:on I www. phC,e rircation.co..r.sg

d
 I--
Question 23
rn
Keith wanted to find out how the size of ice cubes affects the temperature ofwater. He filled two
similar beakers with 200 ml ofwater at room temperature of 30 "C. He placed an ice cube of 100
N
G1
cm3 in one beaker and an ice cube of 50 cm3 in another beaker. He recorded his observations in the
table below.

Temperature of water/ "C

Time/ min
Beaker A Beaker B
1 24 ZO

2 27 16

3 77 11

[aJ Which beaker contained the ice cube of 100 cm3? Explain your answer. (1 m]

(b) How does the size ofthe ice cubes cause the temperature ofwater to decrease? [1 mJ

Ouestion 24
An experiment was set up. There were two poles of the same length, one made of steel and the
other made ofwood. Two pieces ofcotton cloths ofthe same thickness were each wrapped around
each pole. A candle flame was placed at one end ofeach pole as shown in the diagram below.

Steel pole Cotton cloth Wooden pole Cotton cloth

fr Candle Candle

It was noticed that the cloth wrapped around the steel pole was warmer than the cloth wrapped
around the wooden pole. Explain why this is so. (1 m)

d PhD far.;ai.rn I www. phC-rrlucation..cm.:E

 $ ,*o minutes.
metal strips of the same size were ioined together to form a bar. The metal bar was heated for
-Questioa2s
6 Mo [t was observed that it bent as shown in the diagram below.
Metal Y

Metal X

[a) Which metal strip, X or Y, expanded more? Explain your answer. [2 mJ

[b] What conclusion can be made about the expansion of metals when heated? (1 ml

(c) The four metal bars beloware then heated for two minutes each. The results are shown below.

KEY
L.rtr.....t-t
Copper Aluminium Nickel Zinc

Bar P Bar Q

Bar R Bar S

Arrange the metals in order, starting from the metal that expands the least to the metal that
expands the most when heated. (1 ml

Expands least Expands most

PhD Educsaion I www.phd-edL;caaion.co.n.sg

 r
Question 26
N
Spoons X and Y are made of different materials. The two spoons are put into a cup of hot water as
N
shown in the diagram below.
m
Spoon X Spoon Y

After a while, the handles ofboth spoons are touched.

(a) What is the aim of the experiment? (1 mJ

(b) IfSpoon X is made of ceramics and Spoon Y ofstainless steel, what observation would be made
in the experiment? (1 mJ

Spoon X Spoon Y

Observation

[cJ Based on your answer in part [bJ, what conclusion can you make? (1 m)

Question 27
A coffee outlet wrapped a layer of cardboard jacket around the cup of coffee for their customers to
take away as shown in the diagram below.

Cup ofcoffee

]acket

(aJ What was the purpose ofthe cardboard iacket? Explain your answer. (2 m)

(b) Without using the same property mentioned in part [aJ, suggest another property of cardboard
which makes it suitable for making the jacket? [1 mJ

d tl, Educati.n I www. phd-ed.:r;ticn.com.sg

 (^l-An experiment was set up to compare the heat conductivity among three different materials
f,j
-Questr,ol2B -
glass and styrofoam. The temperature of the water at the beginning in each bowl was the
bO wood,
same.

Thermometer

Wooden bowl and cover Glass bowl and cover Styrofoam bowl and cover

[aJ There are two inconsistent variables. State the two variables which should be kept the same to
make the experiment fair. (2 m]
(D

(iD

[b] The experiment was conducted for 20 minutes. How can we tell which material is the most
suitable for keeping water hot? (1 m)

Question 29
A test was conducted to find outif Material X or Material Y was a better conductor of heat. Material
X and Material Y that were ofthe same size were placed on a table. lce blocks ofthe same size at
0 oC were placed on each material to see which block ofice melted faster.

lce block A Ice block B

Material Y
Material X

(aJ Give a reason why the experiment was not a fair one. [1 m]

[bJ Put a tick ["') in the appropriate column below to indicate if the temperature ofthe obiects in
the experiment increased, decreased or remained the same. (2 m)

Increased Decreased Remained the same

Ice block A

Material X

PhD !ducalion I www.qhd-edl:aaicn.com.sg

 I-
Question 30
C')
Two small corks were fixed to two identical plates made of the same metal with wax. One metal
plate was painted white and the other painted black. An electric heater was placed between them at
N
(n
an equal distance from the two plates as shown in the diagram below. The heater was switched on
and after some time, one ofthe corks dropped ofi
Electric heater
Wax
llt
Cork lrl
lal llt
II] Cork
III
White metal plate Black metal plate

(a) What was the aim of the experiment? ( I m)

[b) Which cork would drop off first? Explain your answer. [1 m)

(c) If the white metal plate were replaced by a black wooden block ofthe same size and thickness
as the white metal plate, which cork would drop off first? Why? [L mJ

Question 31
An ice cube was placed and sealed in each of four containers made of different materials of equal
thickness. The containers are identical in size.

Ice cube

Container made Container made Container made Container made

of Material W of Material X of Matcrial Y of Material Z

The graph below shows the time taken for the ice in each container to melt completely.

Time taken for ice to melt/ min

Materials
WXYZ

d PhD aducation I www.phd-education.com.sg

- Based on the graph provided, which material is the least suitable for making containers to keep
-_:(r)
lt, food warm? tl m)
ul
o
(bJ State a property of this material which makes it the least suitable for making containers to keep
food warm. Explain. (2 m)

Question 32
An experiment was set up as shown in the diagram below
-\

Water eat

Ice wrapped in wire gauze

A piece ofice was wrapped in a piece of wire gauze to make it sink to the bottom ofthe test tube
filled with water. The water surface was then heated till it boiled. After some time, it was noticed
that the water at the surface was boiling but the ice did not melt quickly.
[a) What was the aim of the experiment? [1 mJ

[bJ A second experiment was conducted and a piece of wire was attached to the wire gauze as
shown in the diagram below.

Wire attached to the wire gauze

eat
Water

lce wrapped in wire gauze

It was found that the ice melted very quickly after the piece of wire was added. Explain why
such an observation was made in the second experiment. (2 mJ

PhD Education I www. phd-ed ucation.com.sg -

Question 33
F{
An experiment was conducted to find out which material, A or B, is better at keeping heat in. The
experiments were set up as shown below and the investigation plans were written below.
- (r1
ft1
Thermometer

Beaker of water

Material A Material B

Steps Plan A
I Fill 2 similar glass beakers with boiling water at 100 'C
2 Cover one beaker with Material A and the other with Material B

3 Place the thermometer into the water

4 Record the thermometer reading by taking out the thermometer every 3 minutes

Steps Plan B
7 Fill 2 similar glass beakers with boiling water at 100 "C.
2 Cover one beaker with Material A and the other with Material B

3 Place the thermometer into the water.

Read the temperature on the thermometer without taking it out and record it into
4
a table every 3 minutes.
5 Repeat the experiment 3 times

Which is a better plan? Give two reasons to support your answer. [2 mJ

d PhD I o-LaUon I www.phd eoJLation.con sF

 34

E t,ra-"
-ouestion
"aph
below.
N Temperature/'C
40 Container Q

30

20 Container P

10

0 Time/ min
5 10 15 20

The experiment above was set up using similar containers. Identical thermometers were placed in
each container before the containers were covered. The containers were left in the garden under
the sun for a while before being brought into the kitchen. The readings were taken every five
minutes.
(a) Based on the result shown in the graph, which container is a better conductor of heat? Explain
your answer. [1 mJ

(bJ If a container is to keep the water warm for a longer time, which container would you
recommend? Why? (1 m)

Ouestion 35
A test tube was filled with water. Subsequently, an ice cube was placed into the test tube and kept
to the base ofthe test tube with the weight of a piece of wire as shown in the diagram below.

Test tube

Water Heat

Wire
Ice cube

The water near the water surface was then heated. After a while, it was noticed that water droplets
were formed at two places of the test tube.
(a) Draw some water droplets at each place clearly in the diagram above. (2 m)

[b) The water at t}re surface boiled after a few minutes but the ice cube did not melt completely.
Explain why. (1 m)

i
PhD Education I www. phd-education.com.sg

d :
(c) At a restaurant, a cold drink and a hot drink were served to two customers. The waiter placed a
coaster under one of the drinks. Which drink would that be? Give a reason for his action. (2 mJ fn
fn
(Yt

Question 36
Equal amounts of tap water were poured into two similar tins, A and B. Both tins were made of
metal but Tin A was wrapped in black paper while Tin B was wrapped in white paper.
rlz
Position 5

Tin A Tin B

A thermometer was inserted into both tins and they were placed in the open field under bright
sunlight. The temperature ofthe water in both tins was recorded every five minutes for 30 minutes
and a graph is plotted as shown below.
oC
Temperature/

60 Tin A
Tin B
40

20

0 Time/ min
510 15 20 25 30

[a) For Tin A, what is the relationship between the temperature ofthe water and the duration the
tin was placed in the sun? [2 m]

(b) From the results, state the effect ofthe colour ofthe surface ofthe tin on the temperature ofthe
tin. (1 mJ

(cJ On a hot day, Tom wears a black shirt while lohn wears a white shirt. Who will feel hotter?
Explain your answer. [2 mJ

d PhD Education I www. phd-edi:caiion.com.sg

_---------^
uuesDon 5 /
$ Fou. .od, of identical diameters and lengths were used for an experiment. The rods were made of
f,- diff"r.nt .aterials. A ring of wax was put around each of them and each rod was heated at End x.
The time it took for each ring of wax to melt completely was recorded.
End X Ring ofwax

v Rod A

n Rod B

?) Rod C .'
Z Rod D

Rod Time taken for wax to melt completely/ min ^.

A 15

B 27

C 6

D 34

(a) What is the aim of the experiment? (1 m)

^.
[b) Compare the results for Rod B and Rod D. Which rod is a better conductor of heat? Explain your
answer. [1 mJ

(c) If the thickness of Rod C is increased and the experiment is repeated, would the time taken for
the ring of wax to melt be longer or shorter? Explain your answer. [2 m)

(d) Which rod is made of the material most suitable to use for the heating element of a kettle?
Explain your answer. (1 m]

PhD Education I www. phd-education.com-sg

d
 I-
Question 38
A glass tube was inserted into a flask and the glass tube was secured with a rubber stopper. The
l.f)
(Yt
flask was then inverted with the glass tube and one end of the glass tube was placed into a beaker
ofwater. Another two similar set-ups were prepared using the same type ofapparatus. It was
fn
noticed that the water levels in the three glass tubes were the same at the start of the experiment.

Flask I: Flask Flask

D
Glass tube Glass tube Glass tube

Rubber stopper Rubber stopper Rubber stopper

Water level in Water Ievel in Water level in

the glass tube the glass tube the glass tube

Set-up A Set-up B Set-up C

Each ofthe flasks was then heated with different amount ofheat for two minutes. The containers
were then cooled down. As the flasks were cooling down, it was noticed that the water level in the
glass tube was higher than the water level at the start of the experiment.

[aJ Explain why the water level in the glass tube increased as each flask was cooled down. (1 m)

[b) After the flasks have cooled down to room temperature, in which set-up would the water level
in the glass tube be the highest? Explain your answer. (3 m)

d PhD :duca:ion I www. phd-education.com.sg

""-."--ouestlor39
ul
[i
.
An experiment is set up using an empty conical flask and a T-shaped tube, as shown in the diagram
ffr below. A and B are two drops of ink in the tube, which are of equal distance ftom the centre of the
- ' tube. The conical flask is immersed in a basin of hot water at 70 'C. It is noticed that A and B moved
^.
towards Points P and Q respectively.
AB ..
P a
Stopper
Hot water

Conical flask
Basin

(a) Why did the two drops of ink move towards Points P and Q? (1 m)

(bJ The experiment is repeated by immersing the conical flask into basins with water ofdifferent
temperatures and the time taken for the two drops of ink to reach Points P and Q is noted. The
results ofthe experiment are recorded in the table below. ^'
Temperature of Average time taken
Time taken for A Time taken for B
water in the basin/ for A and B to reach
.C to reach Point P/ s to reach Point Q/ s
Points P and Q/ s
80 15.4 15 75.2

90 13.5 73.7 13.6 ^

100 10.5 10.3 10.4

What is the relationship between the temperature ofthe water in the basin and the time taken
for the two drops of ink to reach Points P and Q? (1 mJ

PhD Education I www.phd-education.com-sg

 Theme: Enerry r-
N
(n
21 Energy in Food (Y)

1. The diagram below shows the cross-section of a leaf during photosynthesis.

i-!=li=]iiiliIIl
-

I i-l iilti-l i--1

ili!I irl
ri- Ilil i--l i-)
I

Which one ofthe following is/are the function(sJ ofthe tiny opening Y, found in the leaP
A It allows oxygen to be given out.
B It helps to trap sunlight.
C It allows carbon dioxide to be taken in
D It allows water to be absorbed.
1) A and B only
2) B and C only
3) A and D only
4) A and C only

2. A group of pupils observed a big tree by the roadside and noted that most of the leaves were
found at the higher branches. Which one of the following reasons best explains why this is so?
(11 The leaves will be able to provide shade for the roots.
(2) The leaves will be able to catch more water when it rains.
(31 The leaves will be able to trap sunlight easily to carry out photosynthesis.
(41 The leaves will be able to get more carbon dioxide to carry out photosynthesis.

d PhD Edlrcation I www. phd-education.com.sg

.-3
The diagram below shows how the leafofa balsam plant carries out photosynthesis.
w
w From other parts
ofthe plant
@ A Light enerry
B
To other parts
ofthe plant

The arrows indicate the movement ofdifferent substances entering and leaving the leaf. What
do the different arrows A, B, C and D represent?

A B C D

(1) Sugar Water Oxygen Carbon dioxide

(2) Sugar Carbon dioxide Water Oxygen

t3) Carbon dioxide Oxygen Sugar Water

(4) Water Sugar Carbon dioxide Oxygen

4. Carbon dioxide can be added or removed from the surroundings during the processes W, X, Y
and Z as illustrated below.

+ Carbon dioxide Z
PlanLs Animals
.- in the air
x

Dead matter

Which one ofthe following correctly identifies processes Y and X?

Y x
(1) Photosynthesis Respiration
(2) Decomposition Respiration

t3) Respiration Photosynthesis

(4) Decomposition Photosynthesis

PhD Education I www.phd-education.co.n .rd

5. The graph below shows the percentage of carbon dioxide in the air surrounding a plant
measured over 24 hours. ot
Percentage of carbon dioxide (70)
m
(n
0.04

Point X
Time/ hours
0 1,2 24

Which of the following sets of information explains the percentage of carbon dioxide at Point X?

Time of the day Process taking place

i1) Night Respiration

(2) Night Transpiration

i3l Day Photosynthesis

t4) Day Respiration

6. Which one of the following comparisons between respiration and photosynthesis in plants is
true?

Respiration Photosynthesis

(1) Takes place only at night Takes place only in the day

(2) Takes place in all cells Takes place in the leaves only

i3) Takes place all the time Takes place only when there is light
Requires food and produces Requires oxygen and produces carbon
t4l energy dioxide

7. Which one ofthe following statements about photosynthesis and respiration is the most
accurate?
1) Plants only carry out photosynthesis in the day and only carry out respiration at night.
2) Plants only carry out respiration in the day and only carry out photosynthesis at night.
3) Plants can carry out photosynthesis when there is light but only carry out respiration at
night.
(4) Plants can carry out photosynthesis when there is light but carry out respiration all the
time.

d PhD Edraalion I www.ohd education.com.sg

-----g An experiment is set up as shown in the diagram to find out whether carbon dioxide is needed
w for photosynthesis.
F
o Light

Belljar

Plant

Chemical to remove carbon dioxide

Grease to seal offair

Temperature ofsurrounding: 29 "C

Which one of the following set-ups is the most suitable control for the above experiment?

t1l (2)
4lugnt
Black cover

Chemical to remove
fe
carbon dioxide

Temperature ofsurrounding: 29 "C Temperature of surrounding: 29 "C

(31
I Light
t4l
I Light

Chemical to
absorb oxygen
oC
Temperature ofsurrounding: 29 Temperature ofsurrounding: 32 "C

9. Which of the following statements about photosynthesis is/are true?

A. Water is produced during photosynthesis.
B. Energy is released during photosynthesis.
C. Photosynthesis can take place in the stem of some plants.
D. During photosynthesis, carbon dioxide is removed from the air
(1) A only ..
(2) Cand Donly
(3) A, B and D only
(4) B, C and D only

PID Education I www. phd-education.com.sg

 I-
10. A green plant is placed outdoors on a sunny day. Which graph correctly represents the plant's
rate of photosynthesis? F,l
Rate of photosynthesis
sf
(n
A

.D
Time
8am 2pm 8pm

(1) A
{2) B
(31 C
(4) D

11. An experiment was carried out on a leafas shown in the diagram below

CA
Black paper

KEY

Green area

White area

D B

There was no starch in the leafat the start ofthe experiment. The plant was placed in bright
sunlight for several hours. Subsequently, four discs were cut out from the leaf in the positions
shown and tested for the presence of starch. Which disc(s) contained starch?
1) B only
2) A and C only
3l B and D only
4) C and D only

d PhD Education I www. phd-ed::cation.com. sB

--- |tz. which of the following starements is/are true?
tll A. The Sun is the source offood for all living things.
.E
E B. All living things depend directly on plants for food.
C. Enerry is transferred from the Sun to plants during photosynthesis.
D. Oxygen, water and sunlight are combined in a green leaf to make food.
(1) C only
(2) B and C only
(31 A,BandDonly
(4) A,B,CandD

13. A carbon dioxide detector is fixed on a leaf ofa plant in the Science Garden. The detector
detects the amount ofcarbon dioxide taken in by the plant. The results are recorded over a
period of 18 hours. Which ofthe following graphs is a correct representation ofwhat would be
observed?

(1J Amount of carbon dioxide (2] Amount ofcarbon dioxide

Time Time
6am 72pm 6pm 12 am 6 am 12 pm 6 pm 1.2 am

(3) Amount of carbon dioxide (4J Amount of carbon dioxide

Time Time
6am 72pm 6pm 12 am 6am 12pm 6pm 1.2 am

PhD Education I www. phd-education.com G@[

14. Three test-tubes are set up as shown in the diagram below. Initially, the indicator in each test
r-
tube is red. The indicator changes from red to yellow when exposed to increased levels of (n
carbon dioxide. sf
fn
\ \ \
Lieht\ Lieht\ r,ight\

Wire mesh Live grasshopper Leaf

Indicator

XY z
What will be the colour ofthe indicator in each test-tube after three hours?

x Y Z

(1) Yellow Yellow Yellow

(z) Yellow Red Red

(3) Red Yellow Red

(4) Red Red Yellow

15. Which of the following statements is/are true?

A. Food is stored as starch in the seeds, leaves and roots ofplants.
B. Chlorophyll is needed for photosynthesis and respiration to take place in plants.
C. Photosynthesis takes place only in the day while respiration takes place only at night.
D. Carbon dioxide is produced by plants during respiration and taken in by plants during
photosynthesis.
(1) C only
{2) D only
(3) AandDonly
(41 BandConly

d PhD lducation I www. phd-education.com.sg

-".."--".-"-16.
The leaf is often referred to as a'food factory'as its function is to make food for the plant. The
w leaf below is carrying out this function.
5
5 A

D
E
C

which ofthe following shows the correct set of labels for the arrows?

A B C D E
Carbon
t1) Sunlight Oxygen Sugar Water
dioxide
Carbon
(2) Water Sunlight Water Oxygen
dioxide
Carbon
(31 Oxygen Sunlight Sugar Water
dioxide
Carbon
t4) Sunlight Water Orygen Sugar
dioxide

PhD tducation I www.phd-ed ucation.(om.sB

Ouestion 17
u1
An experiment is conducted to show that sunlight is needed for photosynthesis to occur. Complete
the following table to show the steps to take in carrying out the experiment and the reasons for
- sf
each step so that the test can be conducted to see whether the plant has photosynthesized. (4 m]
rYl

Steps Reasons
Take two pots of plants. Keep Pot A in
1
the dark for a few days.
Expose Pot B to sunlight for 5 to 6
2
hours.

Question 1B
An experiment was conducted to find out ifthe amount ofwater given to plants would affect the
number ofleaves they grew. There were four plants of similar size and the same type. Each plant
had the same number ofleaves at the start ofthe experiment. The amount of water given daily was
different for Plant A, B, C and D. The number of leaves each plant had at the end of each week was
recorded in the table below.

Number ofleaves on the plant at the end ofeach week

Amount of water given Week Week Week Week Week Week
Plant .,
to the plant dailv I 3 4 5 6
A 100 ml 22 23 Z5 30
B 150 ml 23 26 30 37 40
C 200 ml 27 36 39 44
D 250 ml 24 29 34 39 45 50

(a] What is the relationship between the amount ofwater given to the plants and the number of
leaves they grew? (1 m)

(b) At the start of Week 7, Plants A and D were given the same amount of water daily. Which plant
would be able to carry out photosynthesis at a faster rate? Explain how the chosen plant was
able to carry out photosynthesis at a faster rate. [1 mJ

d PhD Education I www.phd-education.com.sB

 ql .
!a An experiment
-Question-1-9 is set up below. Tubes A and B are put in bright sunlight
in a cuPboard.
and Tubes C, D and E are

1i1 Put
Dark cupboard

s unlight s unlight
Water snail al

Water
, ,
Water plant

Tube A Tube B Tube C Tube D Tube E

Set-up X Set-up Y

Three hours later, the amount ofcarbon dioxide in the water in each tube is measured
(a) Which tube has the least amount ofcarbon dioxide? Explain your answer. (2 m)

(b) Which tube has the highest amount ofcarbon dioxide? Explain your answer. (2 mJ

(c) There is no control set up for the experiment. lf it is to be concluded that the change in carbon
dioxide in the water is due to the organisms, what kind of control should be set up for
(iJ Set-up X (1 ml:
(iiJ Set-up Y [1 m):

PhD Education I www. phd-ed ucation-com.sg

 I-
Question 20
l\
The diagram below describes the processes of photosynthesis and respiration in plants.
sf
(n
taken in by roots
(b)
taken in Photosynthesis in the
presence of chlorophyll
Light
produces
produces
taken in
(c)
Food
(a)
produces
taken in
taken in

(d) Respiration
produces

Write down words that best represent (a), (b), (c) and (d). (a m)
(a)
(b)
(cl
(d)

PhD ¤ducation I www.phd-edr.:cation.com.sg

__-__-_r
Theme: Enerry
w
F
@ 22 Forms and Uses of Energy
1. A ball at P was pushed towards Q. It rolled off Q and landed at R. It continued rolling until it
stopped at S.

P
a

t
R S

Which of the following statements are true?

A. The ball has the most kinetic energy at R.
B. The ball has the most potential enerry at P.
C. The kinetic enerry ofthe ball increases from R to S.
D. The potential enerry ofthe ball decreases ftom Q to R.

(11 A and B only

(2) B and D only
(3) A,BandDonly
(41 B,CandDonly

2. Study the circuit in the diagram below. There are four switches marked 51, S2, 53 and 54

s1

S2 s3 S4

Fan Bulb

Which ofthe switches is/are necessary to be closed for the following energy conversion to take
place?
Chemical energy -+ Electrical energy -+ Kinetic energy + Sound energy

tll SZ only
(2) 51 and 54 only
t3l 51 and S2 only
t4) 51, S2 and 53 only

PhD Education I www. phd-education.com.sg

3. Connie throws a ball into the air, then catches it. Which ofthe following correctly identifies the
energy changes that occur after she has thrown the ball? C')
sf
(r1
Ball is moving up At the highest point Ball is moving dovmwards
Kinetic energy is
Potential energy is changing
(1) changing to potential Kinetic energy is zero
to kinetic energy.
energy.
Kinetic energy is
Kinetic energy is
(2) changing to potential Potential energy is zero
maxlmum
energy.
Potential energy is
Potential energy is Kinetic energy is changing to
t3) changing to kinetic
zero potential energy.
energy.
Potential energy is
Potential energy is
t4) changing to kinetic Kinetic energy is zero
maxlmum
energy.

4. The diagram below shows Marble X on the rim ofa bowl and Marble Y at the bottom ofthe
bowl.

When Marble X was released, it rolled down the bowl and collided with Marble Y. Marble Y then
moved up the other side of the bowl. Which one of the following statements is true about
Marbles X and Y from the instance Marble X was released until Marble Y moved up the bowl?

[1 Marble X will have more energy when it hits Marble Y.

(2 Marble Y possesses potential energy when it is at the bottom of the bowl.
(3 Marble X loses kinetic energy when it moves towards Marble Y.
(4 The kinetic energy of Marble X will be converted to heat energy, sound energy and
transferred to Marble Y when it hits Marble Y.

5. Which one of the following has the same energy change as a portable VCD player when it is
used to play a movie?
(1 Oven
(2 Blender
(3 Cuckoo CIock
{4 Television

d PhD Educatior i www.phd-education.com.sg

___________-
6. The diagram shows four boxes which are hung from the ceiling.
w
ut
o
2m
x

.7
Y
Ground

Which of the following statements is/are true?

A. Box X has more gravitational potential energy than Box Z.
B. Box Z has more gravitational potential energy than Box Y.
C. Box W and Box Y have the same amount ofgravitational potential energy.
D. When the strings are cut and all the objects fall onto the ground, all the gravitational
potential energy ofthe obiects will change into kinetic energy.
(11 B only
(Z) AandBonly
(3) AandDonly
(4) CandDonly

7. Which forms of energy are involved when a digital camera is used to take a photograph?
A. Light Enerry
B. Sound Energy
C. Kinetic Energy
D. Electrical Energy
E. Potential Energy

t1) A,BandConly
(2) B,CandDonly
(3) A, B, D and E only
t4) A,B,C,DandE

PhD Education I www. phd-education.co.n.sg

8. Some processes involving energy changes are listed below.
r-
F{
A.
B.
Burning of firewood.
Droppinga ball from a tower.
ln
(n
C. Rubbing of two hands together.
D. Using running water to spin a water wheel connected to an electric generator.
Which one ofthese diagrams correctly shows the energy changes in the processes above?

(11 (z)
Heat energy Heat enerS./
A c B D

Potential enerry Kinetic enerS, Potential enerS, Kinetic enerS/

B A
D C

Electrical eners/ Electrical energy

t3l (4)
Heat energy Heat energy
D c c D

Potential enerry Kinetic enerS, Potential energy Kinetic ener$,

B A
A B

Electrical energy Electrical enerS,

9. A ball is pushed in the direction shown and it rolled towards the end of the slope.

End ofslope

At which point on the slope does the ball have the greatest amount ofkinetic energy?
(1) A
(2) B
t3l C

t4l D

d PhD Educatio.l I www.phd-education.com.sg

 The assembl y of a toy is as shown in the diagram below
w
ut
-10. Electric motor
N Battery
Belt and pulley

t Load lifted

Which ofthe following shows correctly the energy changes that occur when the motor is
connected to the battery?
(1) Potential energy + Kinetic enerry --r Electrical energy -, Kinetic energy
(2) Potential energy J Electrical energy J Kinetic energy J Potential energy
(3) Electrical energy --, Kinetic energy -+ Potential energy --) Kinetic energy
(4) Electrical energy -, Potential energy J Kinetic energy J Potential energy

11. Lay Teng classified the energy that the following underlined objects possess into three groups,
S, T and U. Each group consists of two objects.

Rolling ball
Bowl of rice
Water in a river
Bottle of kerosene
Compressed spring
Stretched rubber band
Which one ofthe following correctly represents the heading for groups S, T and U?

S T U

t1) Kinetic energy Sound energy Potential energy

Gravitational potential Chemical potential Elastic potential
(2)
energv energy energv
Chemical potential Elastic potential
(3) Kinetic energy
energy energy
t4l Sound energy Heat energy Kinetic energy

12. Which one ofthe following shows the correct energy changes that will occur when we hit a nail
with a hammer?
t1l Potential energy -> Heat + Sound energy
(2) Kinetic energy -> Potential energy -> Heat + Sound energy
(3) Potential energy -> Electrical energy -> Heat + Light energy
(4) Potential energy -> Kinetic energy -> Kinetic + Heat + Sound energy

PhD Education I www.phd education.com

'-d
13. Which one ofthe graphs below shows correctly t}re relationship between the amount of
r--
gravitational potential energy ofan obiect [yJ and the height ofthe obiect above the ground [x)? (n
ln
t1l v (2) y fn

x x

t3l y (4) y

x x

14. Boxes of the same mass were hung at different heights on a retort stand. Which of the following
boxes will have the most kinetic energy after each string is cut?

String

Retort stand

(1) A
(2) B
(3) c
(4) D

15. Objects thrown down from high buildings can injure people upon impact. This is largely due to
its high as it hits the person.

(1) heat energy

(2) kinetic energy
(3) chemical potential energy
(4) gravitational potential energy

d PhD Education I www. phd-education.com.sg

 16. The diagram below shows a ball placed at the top ofa slope at Point P. It is then allowed to roll
ul down the slope.
UI
F Ball

s
P R

Which ofthe following graphs best describes the changes in the amount of potential and kinetic
enerry ofthe ball from Point P to Point S?
(1) Enerry Q) Enerry
Potential enerry
Potential enerry

Kinetic enerry
Kinetic enerry

P Q RS P Q RS

t3) Enerry (4) Enerry

Potential enerS,
Kinetic enerry

Potential enerS/
,/ Kinetic energr

P Q RS P Q RS

17. Gary wound his clockwork mouse, then let it move up a steep slope. The mouse ran up the
slope, stopped halfway, then tumbled back to land with a crash at the base ofthe slope. Which
one ofthe energy conversions shown in the table is incorrect?

Activity Energ/ Conversion

Chemical enerry of Gary's muscle to elastic potential

t1) Winding the mouse
energy ofthe spring

Elastic potential energy ofthe spring to gravitational

(2) Mouse moves up the slope
potential energy

Gravitational potential enerry to kinetic energy of

(31 Mouse falls
movement

Kinetic energy ofmovement to sound and heat

(4) Mouse lands with a crash
energy

PhD Education I www. phd-education.com.sg

d
 Position-l-
18. A ball at Position H on a table is set in motion as shown in the diagram below. It rolls to
tO
I, down ftom the table and lands at Position I on the floor. It then continues to roll till it comes
to a stop at Position K. ln
(n
HI
Table top

Floor o K

Which ofthe following conclusions are correct?

A. The ball gains kinetic enerry between Positions I and K.
B. The ball has kinetic energy and potential energy at Position I.
C. The potential energy ofthe ball decreases from Positions I to f.
(11 AandBonly
(2) AandConly
t3) BandConly
(4) A, B and C

19. Which one ofthe following correctly states the energy involved when an electric shaver is being
used?

Useful energr Energ/ which is not useful

(11 Electrical Energy, Sound Enerry Kinetic Enerry
(2) Kinetic Energy, Heat Energy Sound Enerry
(31 Electrical Enerry, Kinetic Energy Sound Enerry
(4) Kinetic Energy, Sound Enerry Heat Energy

hD Education I www. phd-education.com.sg

".".."".-.-20.
Malcolm used pebble and a catapult to shoot at a fruit on a tree as shown in the diagram
w
a
below
Ul
O) OO
o
o oo oo

Which one ofthe following correctly shows the energy conversion that took place when the
catapult was used?
(11 Gravitational potential energy + Sound energy [catapult) -> Kinetic enerry fpebble)
(2) Kinetic energy + Sound energy [catapult) -> Kinetic enerry + Gravitational potential
enerry (pebble)
(31 Kinetic enerry (boy's handJ -> Elastic potential energy (catapult) -> Kinetic energy
[pebbleJ
(4) Elastic potential enerry fboy's hand] -> Kinetic energr [catapult] -> Gravitational
potential energy + Sound energy (pebble]

21. A suspended pendulum swings from Point A to Point B as shown in the diagram below.

A B

Which one ofthe following graphs correctly shows how the potential energy and kinetic energy
ofthe pendulum change from Point A to Point B?
(11 Amount ofenerry {2) Amount ofenerry
Potential . Kinetic

'. Kinetic Potential

Position Position
A B A B

(3) Amount of enerry (4) Amount of enerry

, Kinetic
Potential

Potential .. Kinetic
Position Position
A B A B

PhD Edl]cat:on I www.phd'ed uc ation. cor:r.sg

'd
 I-
22. An experiment was conducted as shown in the diagram below.
N
String Block
In
(n
C

Stone
B Height
A\, o.

Rubber band

The rubber band was pulled backwards together with a stone to Position A. When the stone
was released, it moved forward and hit the block. The block, which was suspended by a string,
swung upwards to Position B and then to Position C before falling back. Which one ofthe
following shows the correct energy transfer?
i1) Chemical potential energy J Kinetic energy in stone J Kinetic energy in block -+ Heat
and sound energy
(2) Elastic potential energy + Kinetic energy in stone --l Gravitational potential energy in
block -+ Heat and sound energy
(3) Elastic potential energy + Kinetic energy in stone --.> Kinetic energy in block + Heat
energy + Sound energy -) Gravitational potential energy in block

t4) Chemical potential energy -+ Kinetic energy in stone -, Gravitational potential energy in
block + Kinetic energy in block + Heat energy + Sound energy

23. A toy was made with two cards, a rubber band and sticky tapes as shown in the diagram below.

Rubber band

Tape

Card

The toy was spread and pressed down on the table. The finger was then let go to release the toy
and it jumped with a snap. The following comments A, B and C were made.
A. The source ofenergy is the finger.
B. When the toy is released, it possesses kinetic energy, sound energy and potential
energy.
C. The height the toy jumps can be increased by adding one more rubber band to the toy.
Which of the following comments are correct?
(1 A and B only
(2 only
A and C
t3 only
B and C
(4 A,BandC

d PhD Education I www.phd education.com.sg

--- lZ+. A ball was thrown up into the air as shown in the diagram below. At various points of the path,
tJ the ball possessed potenhal energy, kinetic energy, or a combination of both.
ul
EB x.
ji
Ax
,.. i
^O i
Vtc
What were the typefs) of enerry the ball possessed at Points A, B and C?

(1) (2)
TyDe of energy Type ofenergy
Position PE KE PE+KE Position PE KE PE+KE
A A
B B
C C

t3l (41
Type of energv Type ofenergv
Position PE KE PE+KE Position PE KE PE+KE
A A
B
C
B
C
II
25. The following table shows several objects that have been classified according to the type of
enerry they mainly possess.

x Y Z
-A book on top ofa shelf -A rolling ball - A ringing bell
- A roller coaster car at -A spinning windmill - A piano being played
the top of a loop

Which one ofthe following objects could be placed under Group X?

(1) An oven in use
(2) A bouncing ball
(3) A whistle being blown
(4) A bus moving on the road

PhD Education I www.phd-education..om.sg

26. Three students, Xena, Yoke Ling and Zoey, set up a pinball machine. They were supposed to pull
the striker to the positions as shown in the diagram below. C')
rn
striker (n

Original length of spring

I I
Xena's Yoke Ling's Zoey's

Assuming that all pinballs were of the same size and weight, they made the following
predictions. Which of the following predictions made by them are correct?
A. Yoke Ling's pinball would not move.
B. Zoey's pinball would move the furthest.
C. Xena needed to extend the length of her striker for the pinball to move further
(11 Aand Bonly
(2) AandConly
(3) B and Conly
(4) All ofthe above

27. Which ofthe following appliances will convert electrical energy to kinetic energy and heat
energy only as useful forms ofenergy, when in use?
A. Radio
B. Blender
C. Toaster
D. Hair dryer
(11 A, B andC only
(Z) C and Donly
(31 B, C and D only
(4) A, B, C and D

28. An experiment was conducted to find the relationship between the number of times the key ofa
toy was turned and the distance it travelled. The results are recorded in a table below.

Number ofturns of key 2 4 6 8

Distance travelled/ cm 10 ZI 29 42

Based on the results in the table above, which one ofthe following conclusions can be drawn
from this experiment?
(1) The greater the number ofturns of key, the greater the potential energy it has.
(2) The greater the number of turns of key, the lesser the potential energy it has.
i3) The lesser the number ofturns ofkey, the greater the kinetic energy possessed by the
toy car.
t4) The lesser the number ofturns ofkey, the greater the distance travelled by the toy car.

d ohD Io-, ,ltic r I www phd coL(,]t u ..Lom ,g

--------^
t,ltesnon zv

$ *"***grambelow.
o
A
C

State the energy change ofthe swing from Position A to C. (1 mJ

Position A Position B Position C

Question 30
State the energy changes that take place in each ofthe following situations.
(a) During photosyntlesis: (1 m)
Light energy -------------> enerry
(from the SunJ

(bJ A lighted matchstick: (2 m)

Potential eners, ------"""'> energy + enerry

(in the matchstick)

(c) A handphone in use: (3 m)

Potential enerry (in the batteryl

i
eners/

I
enerry + enerry + Heat enerry

PhD Educat:on I www.phd-education.com.sg

d
Question 31
F{
Study the set-up below. - (o
Wire
fn
Bell

Metal
support Steel rod
Metal
striker
Wooden support

(a) Explain why the metal striker is pulled towards the steel rod when the switch is closed. (1 mJ

(bl Trace the energy change that should occur for the bell to ring. [3 m)

Sound enersv
energy energy energy
(Bell ringsl

Question 32
A container ofsand is hung above a plastic basin. There is a tiny hole at the bottomofthe container
ofsand. The sand leaks out from the container and as it lands on the basin, it makes a sound.

Sand

Plastic basin

[a) State the energy changes for the sand to make a sound in the plastic basin. (3 m)

(b) Without changing the size of the hole, what can be done to the container of sand such that the
sand will make a louder sound in the plastic basin? [1 m]

d PhD Education I www. phd-education.com.sg

__-__----r
Question 33
w
(r) An experiment is set up as shown in the diagram below. When the ball rolls down the ramp, the
N metal rods hung below the ramp will clink against each other. It is noticed that if the ball has more
kinetic energy, the metal rods will clink against each other more forcefully, producing louder
sound.
Ball

Ramp

Metal

The experiment is then repeated using the same ramp but with balls ofdifferent masses.

200 e

Set-up A

500 g

Set-up B

800 g

Set-up C

(a) Which of the set-ups above would result in the metal rods making the loudest sound when the
balls roll down the ramps? Explain your answer. (2 m)

PhD Educatior I www. phd-education.com.s ;d

[b) In the next experiment, balls ofthe same mass but ramps ofdifferent steepness are used. --(n
r0
m
Set-up X

Set-up Y
30'

Set-up Z

Which ofthe set-ups above would result in the metal rods making the loudest sound when the
balls roll down the ramps? Explain your answer. [2 m)

[c] State one variable that has to be kept constant in order for the experiment to be a fair one.
(1 m)

d PhD Education I www.phd-ed ucation.com.sg

..-ouestlonl4
H O, The diagram below shows water flowing out from a tap. Fill in the blanks in the boxes below to
show the conversion ofenergy ofthe water from Point A to Point B. (2 mJ
E
energy

Point A

Tap _ energy

Running water iltl Point B + sound energy

(bJ Fill in the blanks with suitable word(s). (2 mJ

In an alarm clock, the energy of the batteries is converted to
energy. This energy is then converted to other forms of energy like light and
energy which are useful for the alarm clock to work.

Ouestion 35
The diagram below shows an electric circuit.

+ I + I + +
-

A Bulb

B Btzzer

Nichrome wire
C

In the table below, fill in the energy conversion when the different switches are closed. (3 mJ

Switches closed Energ/ Conversion

A only Chemical potential energy --r Electrical energy J Light energy

Chemical potential energy ---r Electrical energy

A and B only
-+ Light energy + Sound energy

A,BandConly

A,B,CandD

PhD Educatior I www.phd-education.com.sg

d
Question 36
lf)
Wooden plank - to
(n
Distance moved by the car

Measuring tape

An experiment is conducted to find out ifthe height ofthe ramp affects the distance a toy car moves
along the ground. The same toy car is used and released in the same way from a fixed starting point
on the ramp. The distance moved by the toy car along the ground is measured using a measuring
tape and recorded in the table below.

Distance moved by toy car along the ground/ cm

Height of ramp/ cm
1StTry Z"dTry 3rd Try Average
10 34 35
15 48 52 53 51

25 89 B4 88 87

(a) Why must three readings be taken for each height? (1 m)

(bJ The test might not be a fair one.

(iJ What is meant by a fair test? [1 m)

[ii) Is the statement correct? Give a reason for your answer. (1 m)

d PhD Educatian I www.phd-education.com.sg

---__-r^
uuesuon /
(l) ,
5

An experiment is set up as shown in the diagram below. The time taken for the water wheel to spin
6,l ten rounds rs recorded.
O)
Tin

Hole Distance

Water wheel

The results are tabulated below.

Distance of tin from wheel/ cm 15 20 25 30
Time taken/ s 20 15 10 5

(aJ What is the relationship between the distance ofthe tin from the wheel and the time taken for
the water wheel to spin ten rounds? [1 m)

(bl Give an explanation for the tabulated results. (3 m)

[c) Predict the time taken if the distance of the tin from the wheel is 10 cm. (1 m)

PhD Educaaion I www.phd-education.com.sg

d
 Question 38 --
The diagram below shows a newly designed roller coaster track
N
(o
(r1

x
Length of ride

(a) At PositionP, the engine of the car was switched off. At P, what form of enerry must the roller
coaster car have before it could move from P to X? (1 m)

(bJ Why did the roller coaster car come to a stop eventually? (1 m)

Question 39
A marble is positioned on a ramp as shown in the diagram below. It is then given a gentle push and
it rolls down the ramp.

Using the key given, draw the change in the amount of kinetic ener$/ and potential energy of the
marble as it rolls down the ramp in the graph below. (2 ml

Amount ofenerry
&y
Potential enerry
Kinetic enerry

Position
x Y z

Education I www,phd-education.com.sg

d"*u
-_--_-__I
Question 40
w Keith and his friends were riding their bicycles when they decided to have a competition when they
C,r
O reached a bridge. They pedalled as fast as they could from Point L to Point 2 and then they stopped
pedalling. They then lifted their feet from the pedal and coasted to Point 7. A drawing ofthe path
they had taken is shown in the diagram below.

Coasting

Bridge

1 2 34567

t
Start Pedalling stopped

(al At which point did the bicycles travel the fastest? (1 mJ

(b) Describe the energy conversion using the boxes given. (Main energy changes only.) (1 ml

ofthe boys before pedalling at Point 2

(c) What are two other forms of energy that were also present when the bicycles moved on the
path? (2 m)

Question 41
A rubber ball is released from Position 1. It moves through Positions 2,3 and 4 before hitting the
concrete surface.

Position 1

Position 2

Position 3

Position 4
Concrete surfa Ce zzzzzztzzzzzzzz

(a) At which position is the potential energy ofthe rubber ball the greatest? (1 m)

(b) At which position is the kinetic energy of the rubber ball the greatest? [1 ml

PhD Edu.aaion I www. phd-ed ucation.com.sg

Question 42 --C')
The diagram below shows a glass tube with a marble placed at the left section. When the marble is (o
released, it rolls to the right section of the tube before rolling back downwards.
m
R
Pull to release the ball

Marble at
starting position
a
P

[a) At which point [P, Q or RJ will the marble reach before it rolls down to the bottom again? [1 m]

(b) Without adding anything to the set-up, state one change that can be made to ensure the marble
rolls higher before rolling back downwards when it is released. (1 m)

Question 43
A roller coaster car moves along the path as shown in the diagram below.
x

\
z
\
Y /

[a) Will the amount of kinetic energy in the roller coaster car at Point Y be more or less if the slope
surface is rougher? Provide a reason for your answer. (1 mJ

[b) Write down the energy conversion that takes place when the car at the top of the roller coaster
moves down from Point X to Point Y. [1 m)

Gravitational
potential energy of
the roller coaster
+

d PhD Education I www. phd-education.com.sB

 $ *"t*gapparatusare
-ouestion44 found in the Science laboratory.
o
Two batteries Some insulated wires

Retort stand
L
e mmmm
Paper spiral Nichrome wire

These apparatus can be used to illustrate the following energy conversion:

Potential energy -+ Electrical energy -+ Heat enerry J Kinetic enerry

(aJ Draw a diagram in the box below to show how the apparatus should be set up. (2 m)

(b) Briefly explain how the set-up works to illustrate the enerry conversion involved. (1 m)

PhD Education I www.phd-education.com.sg

 r-
Question 45
F{
The diagram shows the circular track of a spin ride at a Theme Park. At Position U, once the person
is securely fastened, a huge force is imparted to the carriage. The ride will take the person for a spin
N
(n
and would not stop until a round is completed on the circular track.
x

iY
w+

U
"-{---

(a) At which position will there be least kinetic energy? (1 m)

[b) Make a comparison of the kinetic enerry and potential energy at Points V and Y. [2 m)

Question 46
Study the diagram below carefully

Bell
llr

Ball

Spring

Handle

t
[a) What will happen when the handle is pulled in the direction ofthe arrow and released? (1 mJ

(b) Fill in the boxes below to show the energy change when the handle is pulled back and released
in the above diagram. [2 mJ

+
Spring Ball Bell
[handle pulled back)

d PhD Fducation I www. phd-education.com.sg

-----_-_-r
Question 47
u, In an experiment, Danny pushed the same box across two different surfaces, A and B
{
19

Box

Surface

The two surfaces, A and B, are magnified as shown in the diagram below.

Box

Surface A Surface B

(a) On which surface, A or B, would Danny require less force to push the box? Explain your answer.
(2 m)

(b) State the energy conversion for the above action. (1 m)

+
in Danny in the moving box between the box
and the surface

PaD Education I www.phd-education.com.sg

 r-
Question 48
fn
Four balls ofthe same size, P, Q R and S, were hung using four similar strings ofdifferent lengh on
a fixed pole above a tray of soft dough.
l\(n

R
P

a
s( )
Soft dough

The strings were then cut and the depth ofthe dent created by each ball on the soft dough was
measured. The experiment was repeated three times and the results were recorded in the table
below.
1*Try 2"dTry 3rd Try
Ball Dent/ cm
P 5.1 4.8 4.7

a 3.0 3.3 2.9

s 0.8 1.3 1.2

(aJ What is the relationship between the height of the ball from the soft dough and the depth of the
dent made by the ball? (1 m)

The table below shows the results of Ball R.

1*Try 2"d Try 3.d Try

7.2 cm 7.5 cm 7.4 cm

(b) Ball P and Ball R are hung at the same height above the soft dough. Explain the difference in
results recorded for these two balls. [1 mJ

(cJ Why was the experiment repeated three times? [1 mJ

d PhD Education I www.phd-education.com.sg

 Theme: Energ1/
w
----
{
5 23 Sources of Energy
1. Study the classification table below

Source of energy

Wind M Sun Waterfall N

Kinetic ener$/ Heat energy Solar energy Kinetic energy Chemical energy

Which one of the following options will best represent M and N?

M N

(1) Biomass Geothermal

(z) oil Natu ral gas

(3) Geothermal Coal

(4) oil Biomass

2. Fossil fuels are energy resources. Which one of the following about fossil fuels is not true?

t1l They have stored energy indirectly from the sun.

(2) They take many millions ofyears to form in the ground
(3) They can exist in the solid, liquid and gaseous states.
(4) They cannot be converted to other forms of energy.

3. Tim used a magnifuing glass to carry out an experiment on a sunny day as shown in the
diagram below and managed to get a burn mark on his paper.
Dr'<
<( )>
Ay'{

'.!.'.1f..

What energy changes took place?

(1) Solar energy was converted to heat and chemical energy.
(2) Solar energy was converted to light and heat energy.
(31 Solar energy was converted to kinetic and sound energy.
(4) Solar energy was converted to potential energy only.

PhD Education I www.phd'education.com.sg

d
4. Which one ofthe following pairs are examples ofsources ofenergy?
I-

lft
t1)
(2)
Steam and coal
N
t3)
Sound energy and water
Elastic potential energy and wind
fn
(4) Gravitational potential energy and kinetic energy

5. Which one of the following statements is correct?

1) All energy on earth is created by the Sun.
z) Potential energy in fossil fuel originates from the Sun.
3) Solar energy only refers to light energy from the Sun.
4) All life depends directly or indirectly on the Sun's light energy only.

6. Which ofthe following statement(s) about fuel is/are not true?

A. They are sources ofpotential energy.
B. They can be in solid, liquid or gaseous state.
C. They only come from organisms that are once alive.
D. They are the only source ofenergy for generating electricity
(11 B and C only
(2) C and D only
(31 A,BandConly
(41 B,CandDonly

7. The diagram below shows how tide water is used to generate electricity

Sluice gates
High water mark

Sea
Basin

Low water mark

Turbine
Estuary floor

Which form(s) of energy does tide water possess in order to generate electricity?
A. Potential Energy
B. Kinetic Energy
C. Sound Energy
D. Heat Energy
(11 A only
(z) A and B only
t3) only
B and D
t4) B,CandD

d PhD Eiiucaticn ] www. phd-ed ucation.co m. sg

---_-^uuesuon u
(l) power
g A .
station uses rubbish instead of fossil fuel to generate electricity. Complete the boxes with
91 !!.MJmain forms ofenergy to show the conversion ofenergy that takes place in the power station.
[Z

energr (in the rubbishl

energy (in steam and boiling water)

enerry (in turbine and generator)

enerry fgenerated by lhe power station)

Question 9
The diagram below shows a solar-powered model car.

Top view Side view

Solar panel

, Electric motor

(ffi Wood
ffi ,
Drive Wheel
wheel
Axle
Rubber band Ruhber hand

(a) Explain how the solar-powered car gets its energy to move. (2 mJ

[b) The toy car was modified by increasing the size ofthe solar panel.
(i) Explain why the modified toy car could move faster than the original toy car. (2 m)

(ii) To carry out an investigation to compare the speed between the original toy car and the
modified toy car, state one variable that should be kept constant. (1 mJ

PhD Education I www. ph d-ed ucation.com.sg

Question 10 --N
The diagram below shows a hydroelectric power plant.
l\
(n
Dam High-level reservoir

Water

Soil

Low-level reservoir

Water
*
Turbines and generators

The dam is built on higher ground for storage ofwater, creating a large reservoir. When water
flows out from the dam, it turns a turbine which is connected to a generator. Electricity is then
produced.
(a) Why do you think water is stored at a higher ground in a hydroelectric power plant? [1 mJ

(b) State one advantage ofgenerating electricity using a hydroelectric power plant. (1 m)

d PhD ioucation I www. phd-eor.rcat ion.com.sg

-----_-r^
uuesnon r r

$ ,n. ,,rr.r. below shows a simplified solar water heater. The absorption panel is placed facing the
ati
w sun so as to absorb as much heat as possible. A tube passes through the absorption panel, into the
water tank and then out again towards the absorption panel. Water fills up the tube and circulates
in the tube.

Absorption panel Hot water out

Cold water in
Tube

(a) Explain how the water in the water tank gets heated up. [2 m)

(b) The tube is made of metal. Explain how this would make the solar water heater more effective.
(1 ml

PhD Education I www.phd-education.com.sg